GENERAL & PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

Contents
SECTION 1............................................................................................................................................. 1
GENERAL AND SITE FACILITIE ................................................................................................................ 1
1 GENERAL AND SITE FACILITIES...................................................................................................... 1
1.1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENT ........................................................................................................... 1
1.3 SCOPE OF WORKS ...................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 OFFICE SPACE AND FACILITIES ................................................................................................... 2
1.4.1 Engineer’s Site Office ............................................................................................................. 2
1.4.2 Sanitation .............................................................................................................................. 2
1.4.3 Office Equipment & Furniture................................................................................................ 2
1.4.4 First Aid Box ........................................................................................................................... 2
1.4.5 Reporting & Monitoring ........................................................................................................ 3
1.4.6 Survey Equipment .................................................................................................................. 3
1.4.7 Responsibility for Offices and Equipment .............................................................................. 3
1.4.8 Measurement and Payment ............................................................................................. 3
1.5 SIGN BOARDS & NAME PLATE .................................................................................................... 4
1.6 PRECAUTIONS & REMEDIAL ACTION FOR MITIGATING ADVERSE ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS . 5
1.6.1 General Requirements ........................................................................................................... 5
1.6.2 Precautions and Mitigation Actions Required on the Part of the Contractor ........................ 5
1.6.3 Site Safety Requirement ........................................................................................................ 6
1.7 MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF TRAFFIC.......................................................................... 8
1.7.1 General .................................................................................................................................. 8
1.7.2 Payment ................................................................................................................................ 8
1.8 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS ................................................................................................................. 8
1.8.1 Measurement and Payment .................................................................................................. 9
1.9 RELOCATION OF PUBLIC UTILITIES & SERVICES........................................................................... 9
1.9.1 Description ............................................................................................................................ 9
1.9.2 Measurement and Payment .................................................................................................. 9
1.10 MATERIAL TESTING........................................................................................................................... 9
1.10.1 Embankment ..................................................................................................................... 9
1.10.2 Sub-grade ........................................................................................................................ 10
1.10.3 Improved Sub-grade........................................................................................................ 10
1.10.4 Sub-Base Course .............................................................................................................. 10
1.10.5 Base Course ..................................................................................................................... 10
1.10.6 Brick on End Edging......................................................................................................... 10
1.10.7 HBB ................................................................................................................................. 10
1.10.8 Reinforced Cement Concrete........................................................................................... 11
1.10.9 Bituminous Material ....................................................................................................... 12
1.10.10 Brick Works ..................................................................................................................... 12
1.10.11 Payment .......................................................................................................................... 12
Normal Testing ................................................................................................................................. 12
Special Testing .................................................................................................................................. 12
SECTION-2 ............................................................................................................................................ 14
CONCRETE STRUCTURE................................................................................................................................. 14
2 CONCRETE STRUCTURE .............................................................................................................. 14
2.1 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................... 14
2.2 PREPARATION OF SITE ............................................................................................................. 14
2.2.1 Description .......................................................................................................................... 14
2.2.2 Construction Requirements ................................................................................................. 14
2.2.3 Basis of Payment ................................................................................................................. 14
2.3 CLEARING AND GRUBBING ...................................................................................................... 14
2.3.1 Description .......................................................................................................................... 14
2.3.2 Preservation of Property ..................................................................................................... 14
2.3.3 Methods of Execution .......................................................................................................... 14
2.4 DISMANTLING OF EXISTING/DAMAGED STRUCTURE .............................................................. 15
2.4.1 Description .......................................................................................................................... 15
2.4.2 Materials ............................................................................................................................. 16
2.4.3 Methods of Execution .......................................................................................................... 16
2.4.4 Measurement and Payment ................................................................................................ 16
2.5 EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION .................................................................................................. 16
2.5.1 Description .......................................................................................................................... 16
2.5.2 Excavation ........................................................................................................................... 16
2.5.3 Disposal of Excavated Material ........................................................................................... 17
2.5.4 Pumping and Bailing ........................................................................................................... 17
2.5.5 Measurement ...................................................................................................................... 18
2.5.6 Payment .............................................................................................................................. 18
2.6 BLINDING CONCRETE ............................................................................................................... 18
2.6.1 Description .......................................................................................................................... 18
2.6.2 Cement: ............................................................................................................................... 19
2.6.3 Coarse aggregate: ............................................................................................................... 19
2.6.4 Fine aggregate: ................................................................................................................... 19
2.6.5 Water: ................................................................................................................................. 19
2.6.6 Payment .............................................................................................................................. 19
2.6.7 The Pay item shall be:.......................................................................................................... 19
2.7 BRICKWORKS .......................................................................................................................... 20
2.7.1 Description.......................................................................................................................... 20
2.7.2 Materials ............................................................................................................................ 20
2.7.3 Specifications for Mortar ................................................................................................... 22
2.7.4 Construction Methods ...................................................................................................... 23
2.7.5 Measurement ..................................................................................................................... 23
2.7.6 Payment .............................................................................................................................. 23
2.8 REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE ........................................................................................... 23
2.8.1 Description ...................................................................................................................... 24
2.8.2 Materials ......................................................................................................................... 24
2.8.3 Composition of Concrete ...................................................................................................... 28
2.8.4 Regulation of Water Content ............................................................................................. 29
2.8.5 Durability of Concrete ..................................................................................................... 30
2.8.6 Sulphate exposures.............................................................................................................. 30
2.8.7 Corrosion of Reinforcement ................................................................................................. 30
2.8.8 Design of Concrete Mix ................................................................................................... 31
2.8.9 Batching ............................................................................................................................... 33
2.8.10 Control of Concrete ................................................................................................................ 34
2.8.11 Concrete Construction ..................................................................................................... 35
2.8.12 Handling and Placing of Concrete ................................................................................... 38
2.8.13 Compaction of Concrete.................................................................................................. 40
2.8.14 Depositing Concrete under Water .................................................................................. 41
2.8.15 Protection of Concrete from Adverse Conditions ............................................................ 41
2.8.16 Curing of Concrete .......................................................................................................... 42
2.8.17 Methods Curing of Concrete ........................................................................................... 43
2.8.18 Surface Finishing ............................................................................................................. 44
2.8.19 Measurement .................................................................................................................. 47
2.8.20 Payment .......................................................................................................................... 47
2.8 BACKFILLING ............................................................................................................................ 48
2.9.1 Backfilling Material ............................................................................................................. 48
2.9.2 Back-filling ........................................................................................................................... 48
2.9.3 Measurement ...................................................................................................................... 49
2.9.4 Payment .............................................................................................................................. 49
2.10 REINFORCEMENT ................................................................................................................... 49
2.10.1 Description ..................................................................................................................... 49
2.10.2 Materials ........................................................................................................................ 49
2.10.3 Ordering Material .......................................................................................................... 50
 2.10.4 Additional Tests .............................................................................................................. 50
2.10.5 Construction Methods .................................................................................................. 50
2.10.6 Substitutions .................................................................................................................. 51
2.10.7 Measurement ................................................................................................................ 51
2.10.8 Payment ......................................................................................................................... 52
2.11 BRICK FLAT SOLING .................................................................................................................. 52
2.11.1 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................... 52
2.11.2 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................. 52
2.11.3 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT...................................................................................................... 52
2.11.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT................................................................................................................... 52
BRICK FLAT SOLING .................................................................................................................................... 52
2.12 PLASTER ON BRICK MASONRY ................................................................................................. 52
2.12.1 Description ...................................................................................................................... 52
2.12.2 Materials ......................................................................................................................... 53
2.12.3 Surface preparation ........................................................................................................ 53
2.12.4 Construction requirements ............................................................................................. 53
2.12.5 Method of Measurement ................................................................................................ 53
2.12.6 Basis of Payment ............................................................................................................. 53
CEMENT SAND (1:4) PLASTER...................................................................................................................... 54
2.13 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE .................................................................................................. 54
2.13.1 Description ...................................................................................................................... 54
2.13.2 Materials ......................................................................................................................... 54
2.13.3 Construction Methods ..................................................................................................... 55
2.13.4 Measurement .................................................................................................................. 56
2.13.5 Payment ................................................................................................................................ 56
2.14 SCAFFOLDING AND FORMWORK .............................................................................................. 56
2.14.1 Approval of Scaffolding and Formwork ......................................................................... 58
3.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................. 59
3.2 CLEARING AND GRUBBING .................................................................................................... 59
3.3 REMOVAL OF EXISTING /DAMAGED STRUCTURE .................................................................... 59
3.4 ROADWAY EXCAVATION ........................................................................................................ 59
3.4.1 Description.......................................................................................................................... 59
3.4.2 Materials ........................................................................................................................ 59
3.4.3 Construction Methods ................................................................................................... 59
3.4.4 Measurement ..................................................................................................................... 60
3.4.5 Payment.............................................................................................................................. 60
3.5 CONSTRUCTION OF EARTHEN EMBANKMENT ..................................................................... 61
3.5.1 Description.......................................................................................................................... 61
3.5.2 Materials ............................................................................................................................ 61
3.5.3 Construction Methods ....................................................................................................... 61
3.5.4 Measurement ..................................................................................................................... 63
3.5.5 Payment.............................................................................................................................. 63
3.6 EARTHEN SHOULDER ............................................................................................................... 63
3.6.1 Description .......................................................................................................................... 63
3.6.2 Materials ............................................................................................................................. 63
3.6.3 Construction Methods ......................................................................................................... 63
3.6.4 Measurement .................................................................................................................. 64
3.6.5 Payment .............................................................................................................................. 64
3.7 BRICK ON END ENDING ............................................................................................................ 64
3.7.1 Description .......................................................................................................................... 64
3.7.2 Materials ............................................................................................................................. 64
3.7.3 Construction Methods ......................................................................................................... 64
3.7.4 Measurement ...................................................................................................................... 64
3.7.5 Payment .............................................................................................................................. 64
3.8 IMPROVED SUBGRADE ............................................................................................................ 64
3.8.1 Description .......................................................................................................................... 64
3.8.2 Materials for ISG ................................................................................................................. 65
3.8.3 Construction Methods ........................................................................................................ 65
3.8.4 Measurement ...................................................................................................................... 66
3.8.5 Payment .............................................................................................................................. 66
3.9 SUB-BASE (AGGREGATE-SAND SUB-BASE) ............................................................................... 66
 3.9.1 Description .......................................................................................................................... 66
3.9.2 Materials ............................................................................................................................. 67
3.9.3 Construction Method........................................................................................................... 67
3.9.4 Measurement ...................................................................................................................... 68
3.9.5 Payment .............................................................................................................................. 68
3.10 WMM BASE COURSE (BRICK CHIPS) ...................................................................................... 68
3.10.1 Description ..................................................................................................................... 68
3.10.2 Materials ........................................................................................................................ 69
3.10.3 Construction Methods ................................................................................................... 69
3.10.4 Measurement ................................................................................................................ 70
3.10.5 Payment ......................................................................................................................... 70
3.11 WATER BOUND MACADAM (WBM) BASE COURSE .................................................................. 70
3.11.1 Description ...................................................................................................................... 70
3.11.2 Materials ......................................................................................................................... 70
3.11.3 Construction methods ..................................................................................................... 71
3.11.4 Measurement .................................................................................................................. 71
3.11.5 Payment .......................................................................................................................... 71
3.12 UPGRADING THE OLD EXISTING WATER BOUND MACADAM .................................................. 72
3.12.1 Description ...................................................................................................................... 72
3.12.2 Materials ......................................................................................................................... 72
312.3 Construction methods ..................................................................................................... 72
3.12.4 Measurement .................................................................................................................. 72
3.12.5 Payment .......................................................................................................................... 72
3.13 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR BITUMINOUS SURFACING ...................................................... 73
3.13.1 Description ...................................................................................................................... 73
3.13.2 Construction .................................................................................................................... 73
3.13.3 Measurement .................................................................................................................. 76
3.13.4 Payment .......................................................................................................................... 76
3.14 PRIME COAT ............................................................................................................................. 76
3.14.1 Description ...................................................................................................................... 76
3.14.2 Materials ......................................................................................................................... 76
3.14.3 Construction Methods ..................................................................................................... 77
3.14.4 Maintenance and opening to Traffic. ............................................................................. 78
3.14.5 Measurement .................................................................................................................. 78
3.14.6 Payment .......................................................................................................................... 78
3.15 TACK COAT ............................................................................................................................... 78
3.15.1 Description ...................................................................................................................... 78
3.15.2 Materials ......................................................................................................................... 78
3.15.3 Construction Methods ..................................................................................................... 78
3.15.4 Measurement .................................................................................................................. 79
3.15.5 Payment .......................................................................................................................... 79
3.16 PREMIX BITUMINOUS CARPETING ........................................................................................... 79
3.16.1 Description ...................................................................................................................... 79
3.16.2 Materials ......................................................................................................................... 79
3.16.3 Construction Methods ..................................................................................................... 80
3.16.4 Quality Control of Material and Work ............................................................................ 81
3.16.5 Measurement ........................................................................................................................ 82
3.16.6 Payment .......................................................................................................................... 82
3.17 PREMIX BITUMINOUS SURFACE WEARING COURSE ................................................................ 82
3.17.1 Description ...................................................................................................................... 82
3.17.2 Materials ......................................................................................................................... 82
3.17.3 Construction Methods ..................................................................................................... 83
3.17.4 Quality Control of Material and Work ............................................................................ 83
3.17.5 Measurement .................................................................................................................. 83
3.17.6 Payment .......................................................................................................................... 83
3.18 DENSE BITUMINOUS SURFACING (PLANT METHOD) ............................................................ 83
3.18.2 Description ..................................................................................................................... 83
3.18.3 Materials ........................................................................................................................ 85
3.18.4 Construction Methods .................................................................................................... 86
3.18.5 Measurement .................................................................................................................. 88
3.18.6 Payment .......................................................................................................................... 88
 3.19 REPAIR WORKS ........................................................................................................................ 89
3.19.1 General............................................................................................................................ 89
3.19.2 Types of Repair Works .................................................................................................... 89
3.19.3 General Requirements of Repair Works .......................................................................... 90
3.19.4 Measurement and Payment ........................................................................................... 91
3.20 RAVEL REPAIR ......................................................................................................................... 91
3.20.1 Description ..................................................................................................................... 91
3.20.2 Materials ........................................................................................................................ 91
3.20.3 Construction Methods ................................................................................................... 91
3.20.4 Opening to Traffic .......................................................................................................... 91
3.20.5 Quality Control ............................................................................................................... 91
3.20.6 Measurement ................................................................................................................ 92
3.20.7 Payment ......................................................................................................................... 92
3.21 DEPRESSION PATCHING ......................................................................................................... 92
3.21.1 Description ..................................................................................................................... 92
3.21.2 Materials ........................................................................................................................ 92
3.21.3 Construction Methods ................................................................................................... 93
3.21.4 Opening to Traffic .......................................................................................................... 93
3.21.5 Quality Control ............................................................................................................... 93
3.21.6 Measurement ...................................................................................................................... 94
3.22.7 Payment ......................................................................................................................... 94
3.22 POTHOLE REPAIR .................................................................................................................... 94
3.22.1 Description ...................................................................................................................... 94
3.22.2 Materials ......................................................................................................................... 95
3.22.3 Construction Methods ..................................................................................................... 95
3.22.4 Opening to Traffic ........................................................................................................... 95
3.22.5 Quality Control ................................................................................................................ 95
3.13.6 Measurement .................................................................................................................. 95
3.22.7 Payment .......................................................................................................................... 95
3.23 EDGE REPAIR ............................................................................................................................ 96
3.23.1 Description ...................................................................................................................... 96
3.23.2 Materials ......................................................................................................................... 96
3.23.3 Construction Methods ..................................................................................................... 96
3.23.4 Opening to Traffic ........................................................................................................... 97
3.23.5 Quality Control ................................................................................................................ 97
3.23.6 Measurement .................................................................................................................. 97
3.23.7 Payment .......................................................................................................................... 97
3.24 PREMIX BITUMINOUS SURFACING WEARING COURSE-15MM THICK. ............................... 98
3.24.1 Description ..................................................................................................................... 98
3.24.2 Materials ........................................................................................................................ 98
3.24.3 Construction methods ....................................................................................................... 98
3.24.4 Measurement ................................................................................................................ 99
3.24.5 Payment ......................................................................................................................... 99
3.25 KERB, GUTTER AND EDGE DETAIL .............................................................................................. 99
3.25.1 Description ...................................................................................................................... 99
3.25.2 Materials ......................................................................................................................... 99
3.25.3 Construction Methods.................................................................................................. 100
3.25.4 Measurement ................................................................................................................ 100
3.25.5 Payment ........................................................................................................................ 100
3.26 ROADMARKINGS.................................................................................................................... 101
3.26.1 Description .................................................................................................................... 101
3.26.2 Materials ....................................................................................................................... 101
3.26.3 Construction Methods .................................................................................................. 102
3.26.4 Measurement ................................................................................................................ 105
3.26.5 Payment ........................................................................................................................ 105
3.27 RIGID PAVEMENT ................................................................................................................. 105
3.27.1 Description ................................................................................................................... 105
3.27.2 Materials for Rigid Pavement ..................................................................................... 105
3.27.3 Composition of concrete ............................................................................................. 107
3.27.4 Construction Methods ................................................................................................. 108
CHAPTER-4: ...................................................................................................................................... 112
ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL MANAGEMENT PLAN (ESMP) & ENVIRONMENTAL CODE OF PRACTICE
(ECP) ................................................................................................................................................. 112
4.1 ENVIRONMENTAL CODE OF PRACTICE (ECP) .................................................................................... 112
4.1.1 Environmental Risks Identification and Mitigation Measures . Error! Bookmark not defined.
4.1.2 Potential Environmental Impacts ............................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
4.1.3 Natural Environment ............................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
4.1.4 Social Environment .................................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
4.1.5 Grievance Redress Mechanism for Workers ............................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
4.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN (EMP) AND SOCIAL MANAGEMENT PLAN (SMP) . ERROR! BOOKMARK
NOT DEFINED.
4.2.1 Environmental Impacts and Prescribed Mitigation and Enhancement Measures ......... Error!
Bookmark not defined.
4.3 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL MONITORING PLAN (EMP) .............................. ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED.
4.3.1 Reporting and feedback adjustment ......................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
4.3.2Environmental and Social Monitoring Budget.............................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
 ABBREVIATIONS

AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation

AIV Aggregate Impact Value
AS Aggregate & Sand
ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials
BC Bituminous Carpeting
BDT Bangladesh Taka
BM Benchmark
BMD Bangladesh Meteorological Department
BOQ Bill of Quantity
BSTI Bangladesh Standards Testing Institute
CBP Cox’s Bazar Pourashava
CBR California Bearing Ratio
CuCC Cumilla City Corporation
CE Chief Engineer
DSM Design-Management-Supervision
EC Engineer-in-Charge
FI Flakiness Index
FM Fineness Modulus
GCC Gazipur City Corporation
HSU Hatridge Smoke Unit
HWL High Water Level
JICA Japan International Cooperation Agency
LGED Local Government Engineering Department
LAA Los Angeles Abrasion
LS Lump Sum
LWL Low Water Level
MDD Maximum dry density
MSL Mean Sea Level
O&M Operation and Maintenance
PD Project Director
PIU Project Implementation Unit
PMU Project Management Unit
PVC Polyvinyl Chloride
PWD Public Works Department
RCC Reinforced Cement Concrete
ROW Right of Way
SOB Survey of Bangladesh
UDCGP Urban Development & City Governance Project
uPVC Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride
WA Water Absorption
WBM Water Bound Macadam
WMM Wet Mix Macadam
 SECTION 1
GENERAL AND SITE FACILITIE

1 GENERAL AND SITE FACILITIES

1.1 INTRODUCTION
These technical specifications are part of the bid documents of the Sub-Project- UDCGP-NCC-
D-1, Construction of RCC Drain in East side of Bangabandhu Road with Footpath (Ch.
2+225.00). The location of the Sub-Project is in Narayanganj City Corporation. The
Narayanganj City Corporation is the executing agency, and the Local Government Engineering
Department is the implementing agency. This Sub-Project is one of the 41 Sub-Projects of the
Urban Development & City Governance Project (UDCGP) funded by the Japan International
Cooperation Agency (JICA) & the Government of Bangladesh.
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENT
The Technical Specifications applicable to this contract shall be read in conjunction with other
bid documents namely Invitation for Bids, Instructions to Bidders, Bidding Data, Forms of Bid,
Appendix to Bid and Bid Security, General Conditions of Contract (GCC), Particular Condition
of Contract (PCC), Form of Agreement, Form of Performance Security and Bank Guarantee
for Advance Payment, Bill of Quantities, Drawings and other related documents together with
any addendum issued.
The specifications in accordance with which the entire work under the contract shall be
constructed and completed by the Contractor have been described in following chapters:
Notwithstanding anything contained in the Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall be
deemed to have visited the sites and by his own independent observation and enquiry,
acquainted himself fully with local conditions, accuracy of the local records, accessibility of
the sites (including working areas) and full extent and nature of all operations necessary for the
full and proper execution of the contract, including, but not limited to the following:
a). availability of potable water and electricity,
b). space for construction of temporary works, labour accommodation,
c). the character of soil, water table, extremes of weather and other natural conditions,
d). the supply and use of labour, transportation of materials, equipment and plant,
e). all other things necessary for the proper construction, completion and maintenance of the
work according to Conditions of Contract, Specification and Drawings,
f). labour law and any other law that may affect the Contractor.
The specifications call for specific tests of materials, testing methods and standards. In addition
to Bangladesh Standard (BDS), other equivalent international standards have been mentioned
in the specification for the convenience of the Contractor. Materials shall be in accordance with
BDS, ASTM or ASSHTO Standards.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that necessary tests of materials and
measurement of works are carried out in order to ensure that quality of work is maintained as
per requirement of this specification. Due allowance in the Contractor’s program of work shall
be kept for necessary testing of materials.
1.3 SCOPE OF WORKS
The scope of work shall be the construction of RCC U-drain with cover slab, RCC pipe drain
and fixing manhole, etc. The work also includes repairing roads and footpaths that will be
damaged during construction of drain and providing utility duct along footpath on eastside of
Bangabandhu road.
The total length of the drain and road is approximately 2884 linear meters.

Page | 1
1.4 OFFICE SPACE AND FACILITIES
1.4.1 Engineer’s Site Office
In addition to the office space required for his own use the Contractor shall provide and
maintain Engineer’s Site Office of 15sqm plinth area space with toilet facilities, furniture, and
office equipment for the use of the Engineer in Charge and his staff:
Engineer’s Site Office for the Engineer in Charge shall mean a building constructed of
brickwork with C.I. sheet roofing and a protective' ceiling made of hard board and timber to
the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge. The floor shall be finished with a layer of brick,
patent stone and neat cement finish. No irregularity in the floor surface will be allowed. The
foundation of this building shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge.
Access road to the Engineer’s Site Office, sufficient parking accommodation and hard
standing shades for vehicles shall be constructed by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide, office table and four chairs, all of a standard approved by the
Engineer in Charge.
The Engineer’s Site Office shall be maintained watertight and shall be provided with
ventilation. All doors shall be fitted with approved locks.
Windows shall be provided with separate screens and blinds and shall have interior locking
devices.
The Engineer’s Site Office complete furnishings, fittings, access roads and hard standings shall
be ready, for occupation by the Engineer in Charge, within four weeks of the date when the
Contractor first occupies the site.
All offices shall be regularly and properly cleaned as long as they are in use.
All access roads and hard standings shall be maintained in a well-drained, conveniently
trafficable condition, throughout the contract period.
The general location of the Engineer’s Site Office shall be decided by the Engineer in Charge
in consideration of the Contractor's work plans. The field office shall be situated at locations
that shall not be liable to flooding.
1.4.2 Sanitation
The Contractor shall provide adequate water-borne sanitation and refuse collection and
disposal, complying with the Laws of Bangladesh and all local By-Laws, and to the satisfaction
of the Engineer in Charge, for all offices, workshops, houses etc. erected on the Site.
1.4.3 Office Equipment & Furniture
Minor items of field office equipment such as filing trays, punches, staplers etc. shall be
supplied in reasonable quantities as requested by the Engineer in Charge.
Consumables such as paper, pens, files etc. shall be supplied in reasonable quantities as
requested from time to time by the Engineer in Charge.
Upon completion of the Contract, the office equipment listed above shall become the property
of the Department.
The Contractor shall provide the following furniture for the field office.
 One (1) wooden office table of size 1.5m x 0.8m and 750mm in height and built-in drawers.
 One (1) cushion chair
 Two (2) visitor chairs
 One (1) steel filing cabinet with four (4) drawers and locking arrangement.
1.4.4 First Aid Box
Supplying and providing first aid box with necessary material and medicine. Items shall
include hygienic gown, thermometer, adhesive dressing, antiseptic solutions, bandage, cotton

Page | 2
 balls ow swaps, emergency blankets, gloves, hand sanitizer, ice pack, saline,
emergency medicines.
1.4.5 Reporting & Monitoring
01. The Contractor shall keep a Site Order Book on site at all times.
02. Instructions on the work and all site visits shall be recorded in the Site Order book.
1.4.6 Survey Equipment
As per requirement of the programme survey equipment shall be provided on each contract
site for use by the Contractor's and the Engineer in Charge's staff. List of such survey
equipment are given below:
1 No. - Optical square
1 No. - Spirit level (metal 1 m long)
1 No. - Steel measuring tape 25m long
1 No. - Steel measuring tape 5m long
1 No. - Leveling staff 3m long
5 Nos.- Ranging poles
1 No. - Surveyor's plumb bob
1 No. - Wild T-1A theodolite with tripod (or equivalent).
1 No. - Wild NA-2 automatic level with tripod (or equivalent)
1 No. - Traversing targets with tripods.
1 No. - Measuring wheel.
Miscellaneous tools and minor items of survey equipment such as umbrellas, hammers, knives
etc. shall be always available on site in reasonable quantities for use by the Contractor's and the
Engineer in Charge's staff. Consumables such as pegs, stakes, string lines, paint, marking
crayons, etc., shall be always available on site in reasonable quantities for use by the
Contractor's and the Engineer in Charge's staff.
Upon completion of the Contract, the survey equipment listed above shall remain as the
property of the Contractor.
1.4.7 Responsibility for Offices and Equipment
The Contractor shall provide and maintain all the furnishings and equipment detailed and shall
replace any equipment which is lost or irreparably damaged subject to the conditions that the
Engineer in Charge shall ensure his staff to take all reasonable precautions in the handling,
operation, and transport of such equipment.
The Contractor shall pay all expenses in respect of water, electricity (where available), garbage
cleaning etc. necessary for the running of the offices.
The Contractor shall supply all necessary labour such as office boys, cleaners, messengers, road
men, and chainmen etc. to assist the Engineer in Charge and his staff in the fulfillment of their
duties.
1.4.8 Measurement and Payment
Payment for all the Field Office, equipment, photographs, services etc. detailed in this article
shall be made as described below, where price and payment shall be full compensations for
complying with this section of the Specification and the Conditions of Contract.
Payment of the rates for the Pay Items shall be full compensation for supplying, erecting, and
maintaining the Field Offices for the Engineer in Charge, including all furniture and fittings,
access roads, office equipment, sign boards, etc. all in accordance with the requirements of the
above provisions.
No separate payment shall be made to the Contractor for providing the survey equipment
mentioned in Article 1.4.6 and their maintenance and repair, if necessary, including the
miscellaneous tools and minor items, as well as the mentioned consumables. Compensation for

Page | 3
 the above shall be deemed to be included in the other pay items in the Bill of Quantities.
Payment of Engineer’s Site Office shall be the following Pay items.
Name of the Item Unit
Provide, erect and maintain office for the Engineer in Charge including
Lump Sum
furniture, survey equipment and consumables
1.5 SIGN BOARDS & NAME PLATE
1.5.1 Sign Boards
The Contractor shall provide one project profile signboard for each site of the size that is
mentioned in BoQ and maintain them in good condition. All information on the signboards will
be written in English. The signboards will be positioned as directed by the Engineer in Charge.
The Contractor shall submit proposals for the materials of the signboards, the text layout on an
approved background and installation of the signboards on Site to the Engineer in Charge for
approval. Each sign board shall show:
- Name of Sub-Project
- Name of Ministry/Division
- Name of Implementing Entity
- the name of the Procuring Entity
- Name of the Development Partner
- all other details as may be required by the Engineer in Charge.
Payment of Sign Boards shall be the following Pay items.
Name of the Item Unit
Sub-Project Profile Sign Boards Sqm

1.5.2 Name Plate

The work covered by this item shall consist of supply, fitting and fixing of
600mmX450mmX18mm marble Name Plate in RCC post of size 1050 mm x 750 mm x 75mm.
The marble Name Plate shall be engraved with the name of the Project (Urban Development
and City Governance Project) and name of the fund (Japanese ODA Loan). The language of
writing on the Name Plate shall be English. The writing details are shown in approved drawing.
The Contractor shall get the approval of the writing from the Engineer in Charge before
engraving in Name Plate.
The Post of the Name Plate shall be reinforced cement concrete (1:2:4) plate with plate
thickness 75mm. The coarse aggregate shall be 20mm downgraded brick chips in correct
position true to line and level. Coarse aggregate shall be crushed bricks chips LAA value not
exceeding 38. Brick chips shall be made from first class bricks or picked jhama bricks. Bricks
aggregate shall be as far practically as possible of uniform specific gravity. Brown bricks or
ununiformly burnt bricks shall not be crushed for the purpose of providing aggregates. Best
possible first class or picked Jhama bricks of selected quality only shall be allowed to be
crushing. All brick aggregates shall have to be screened and washed at the contractor’s own
cost. Bricks aggregates shall consist of clean, well- shaped cubical particles, free from
splintered and flaky particles, soil, organic matter, or any deleterious material. Fine aggregate
shall be sand of minimum FM 1.8. Cement shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO/ASTM conforming to BDS EN 197-1 CEM-II/B-M.
The RCC Plate shall be firmly fixed to the ground by means of properly designed foundation
as per approved drawing with first class brick work in cement mortar (1:4), filling the interstices
tightly with mortar, racking out joints, cleaning, and soaking bricks for at least 24 hours before
use. The bricks shall qualify as per sub-section 2.7.2.1 of these specifications. The Fine
aggregate shall be sand of minimum FM 1.2. Cement shall conform to the requirements of

Page | 4
 AASHTO/ASTM conforming to BDS EN 197-1 CEM-II/B-M.
Payment of Name Plate shall be the following Pay items.
Name of the Item Unit
RCC Post along with brick foundation each

Marble Name Plate Square metre

1.6 PRECAUTIONS & REMEDIAL ACTION FOR MITIGATING ADVERSE

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS
1.6.1 General Requirements
The Contractor shall be responsible for taking all the necessary measures and precautions to
ensure that, at executions of the works all the associated on-site and off-site operations conform
to all statutory and regulatory environmental requirements.
The Contractor shall plan his operations and take all the measures and precautions to avoid any
nuisance or disturbance arising from the execution of the works. This shall, as far as possible,
be achieved by suppression of the nuisance at source rather than abatement of the nuisance once
generated.
All the actions taken for obviating/mitigating the adverse impacts on the environment arising
from the construction operations shall be deemed to be the Contractor's obligation and
responsibility under the contract and no separate payment shall be made for this purpose.
The Contractor shall also comply with the requirements of “The Environmental Conservation
Act, 2010” and “Environmental Conservation Rule 1997” of Bangladesh.
1.6.2 Precautions and Mitigation Actions Required on the Part of the Contractor
The Contractor shall plan, organize and carry out his operations in such a manner that these
have least adverse impact on the environment. He shall also take appropriate measures for
mitigating any remaining impacts.
The Construction activities will bring forth several issues concerning the environment. Some
of these, along with the action required on the part of the Contractor, are shown below. The
Contractor, within 14 days of commencement of the works, shall inform the Engineer in Charge
in writing his proposals for dealing with each of these issues as a part of his overall Construction
Environmental Management Plan. He may also bring out along with his proposed actions any
other issue, which he anticipates during the construction operation.

Mitigation Measures Required on the Part of the Contractor on Environmental Issues

Sl. Activity / Concern Action Required on the Part of the Contractor
No.
1 2 3
1. Quarrying To get PMU/PIU permission and satisfy statutory
provisions.
2. Operation of stationary plants To be located safe distance from human settlements. The
like concrete mixing plant, plants should have noise and dust arresters.
crusher etc.
3. Transport of loose natural To carry the materials in moist condition or wet the top
materials like soil, sand etc. layer by water sprays. On windy days, sand trucks should
be covered over by tarpaulin or similar other materials.
4. Disposal of excavated Should be at location approved by Engineer in Charge. The
unsuitable material /waste dumping shall not affect water flow/water bodies or pollute
materials /debris /rubbish surface/subsurface water.

Page | 5
 5. Safeguard to roadside water No garbage, debris or other waste material shall be allowed
bodies, ponds, streams, to be dumped into these.
waterways
6. Storage of fuel and chemicals Shall be in properly fenced, protected location with
firefighting equipment. All precautions against leakage,
pilferage, or unauthorized use of the material shall be
taken.
7. Water Quality The operation shall not pollute surface or underground
water or cause flooding /erosion/ siltation. Drinking water
supplied to workmen shall be tested by a standard
laboratory and it shall be ensured that the water does not
contain Arsenic or other injurious chemicals.
8. Air Quality Construction vehicles and machines shall be kept well-
tuned and in good working order. The Engines should be
switched off while not in use. Dust generating operations
shall not be taken up during high wind periods.
9. Noise The vehicles and machinery shall have accepted silencers
and noise abating measures.
While operating in sensitive areas like residential areas,
hospitals and other medical facilities, the working period
shall be limited to daytime only.
10. Working near sensitive areas While working near sensitive areas like hospitals, schools,
nurseries etc. advance notice shall be given to the affected
people so that they can take necessary protective measures.
11. Healthcare of workmen The contractor's workmen shall be provided with first aid
and other healthcare facilities. For all workmen in his
labour camp, the Contractor shall have health checkup
carried out to ensure that none of his workmen have
communicable and deadly diseases.
12. Sanitary facilities for labour Where a camp for stay of the workmen is established, the
camp Contractor shall ensure supply of potable water (arsenic
free) and provide necessary facilities for the disposal of
solid and human waste satisfying the requirements of the
local public health authorities.
13. Dust All surfaces creating a significant amount of dust in the
atmosphere shall be watered regularly by the Contractor.
14. Accumulation of waste, debris, Throughout the construction period, the Contractor shall
and rubbish keep the site free from accumulation of waste, unsuitable
materials, debris, and rubbish.

1.6.2.1 Measurement and Payment

Payment for all the Environmental Plans, precautions mitigative actions and remedial actions
will be deemed to be included for by the contractor in his rates for the Works.
1.6.3 Site Safety Requirement
1.6.3.1 General

Page | 6
 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing adequate and necessary safety measures for
all persons engaged in the execution of the works against any injury, hazard, accidents etc. and
shall take such safety precautions as are generally accepted as good civil engineering practice.
The Contractor is reminded that the sites are within the boundaries of existing operational
educational institutions, and that all necessary safeguards to protect the public, especially
children, need to be implemented. In particular keeping the public out of the site must be a
priority, and the Contractors plans to achieve this, at all stages of the works, must be agreed
with the Engineer, but will remain the responsibility of the Contractor.
1.6.3.2 Safety of Workmen
The Contractor shall take all necessary measures and action for the safety of the workmen.
Workmen employed on vulnerable operations shall be provided with the following:
- Crash Helmets - Generally, for all workers
- Gum Boots and Gloves and - Workmen employed on cement
appropriate respiratory protective concrete works
equipment
- Goggles - For welders and workmen in dusty
areas
1.6.3.3 Site Precautions
Construction sites shall be delineated in the absence of boundary wall by adequate fences.
1.6.3.4 Site Amenities
The Contractor shall provide toilet facilities in all construction sites. If sewer connection is
not available, temporary wells shall be used. These wells shall be provided with proper
covers.
1.6.3.5 Excavation Work
The Contractor shall design and construct any foundation work to ensure the safety of the
workmen, neighbors and adjoining structures during the construction.
1.6.3.6 Excavated Material and Surcharges
Excavated materials shall be kept away from the edges of the trench to provide a clear berm
of safe width. Where this is not possible, the design of protection for the trenches shall
include for the additional load due to the surcharges of excavated materials.
1.6.3.7 Fencing, Warning Sign and Watchman
The Contractor shall provide fences all around the construction sites. No trespassing shall be
allowed. He should also provide sufficient number of noticeboards, danger signs, lights etc. in
the area. He will liaise with the Ward Counselors to ensure the safety of the public.
1.6.3.8 Adjoining Properties
Where bored or driven piling works are to be carried out in the vicinity of existing structures
which are likely to be damaged, tell-tales shall be fixed on such structures to monitor their
behavior while piling is in progress. Timely precautions shall be taken against any adverse
effect.
1.6.3.9 Protection of materials, plants etc.
The Contractor shall arrange security guards for the protection of materials and plants against
theft, pilferage etc. The Contractor shall provide temporary fencing and/or watching and
lighting deemed necessary for the purpose. Such security shall be in force for the entire period
of construction.
1.6.4.10 Safety against Fire at Site
The Contractor shall arrange at each site at least two 3 kg capacity multipurpose ABCE dry

Page | 7
 chemical powder stored pressure type fire extinguisher with manometer system. The
extinguisher shall be of the type suitable for repeated use complete with wall brackets, discharge
valve, hose pipe and easy refilling system.
In addition to that, two buckets for sand and two buckets for water shall also be provided at
site. Proper arrangements shall be made to hang the extinguishers as well as buckets.
1.6.3.11 Usable Water on Site
The Contractor himself shall make arrangements for procuring, transporting, storing,
distributing and supplying the water needed for construction purposes. No payment will be
made for water, the total cost of which will be deemed to be included by the Contractor in his
rates for the Works.
Only clean potable water, of acceptable salinity levels (not more than 250 ppm for drinking and
500ppm for construction) and free from undesirable concentrations of deleterious materials,
shall be used. All water sources used shall be approved by the Engineer in Charge.
1.6.3.12 Measurement and Payment
Payment for all the items, materials required, and actions taken relating to Site Safety will be
deemed to be included by the Contractor in his rates for the Works.
1.7 MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF TRAFFIC
1.7.1 General
The Contractor shall at all-time maintain the traffic flow along the existing roads, rivers and
canals. The Contractor shall provide and maintain all detours, temporary roads, temporary
bridges, necessary barricades, warning lights and guide signs as well as other equipment at all
hours during the day and- night throughout the period of construction.
Upon completion of the work, all temporary roads, temporary bridges, barricades, signs and
other equipment shall be completely removed.
1.7.2 Payment
The construction, maintenance, and ultimate removal of all temporary constructions as well as
provision and maintenance of barricades, signs and other equipment shall be paid for at a lump
sum price.
This sum shall cover all earthworks, temporary bridges and culverts, pavement and surfacing
materials, warning signs, lights, control of traffic, including single lane working, by day and by
night and all other items to ensure the smooth and safe flow of traffic and for their removal
after the period of construction.
Partial payments to be inserted in the monthly certificates shall be directly proportional to the
value of the completed works. However, payments shall not exceed the lump sum inserted in
the Bill of Quantities.
Payment of Maintenance and Protection of Traffic shall be the Pay item:
Item Name Unit
Maintenance and Protection of Traffic Lump Sum

1.8 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

The Contractor shall furnish one complete set of As-built drawings on electronic format (on a
CD) and 3 sets of as-built drawings subject to the Engineer’s approval provided in Auto-CAD
software in A-2 size standard drawing paper and operating and maintenance manual of the
equipment and plant incorporated in the works in original. The Contractor shall submit the As-
built drawings, showing the permanent works as actually constructed, within one month of
completion of the Works. Included in the sets of As-built Drawings will be revisions of Tender
Drawings and Drawings supplied to the Contractor during the Contract as well as revisions of

Page | 8
 drawings supplied by the Contractor during the Contract. The As-built drawings submitted by
the Contractor will be subject to the approval of the Engineer in Charge. The Engineer in Charge
will supply information required on title blocks."
If the Contractor does not supply the as-built drawings and operating and maintenance manuals
within stipulated time or they do not receive the Engineer-in-Charge’s approval, the Engineer-
in-Charge shall withhold the amount stated in the PCC from the payments due to the Contractor.
1.8.1 Measurement and Payment
Payment for As-built drawings shall be made to the Contractor at the Contract unit price per set
of drawings.
Payment of the As-Built Drawings shall be the Pay item:
Item Name Unit
Furnish one complete set of As-built drawings on electronic Per Tender
format (on a CD) and 3 sets of as-built drawings in A-2 size
standard drawing paper

1.9 RELOCATION OF PUBLIC UTILITIES & SERVICES

1.9.1 Description
The Contractor shall be responsible for establishing the locations of all public utilities within
the Site of the Works, and for their protection. Where the necessity for the permanent
relocation of public utilities has been identified, details may be indicated in the Drawings.
Should the Contractor consider that the temporary diversion of public utilities is necessary to
carry out Contract works, he shall submit details of his proposals to the Engineer in Charge.
Relocation works will normally be undertaken by the concerned authorities, with which the
Contractor will be expected to liaise. The Contractor shall indicate relocation works in his
Contract Program.
1.9.2 Measurement and Payment
The Contractor should include for costs associated with the location and protection of public
utilities and the temporary diversion of public utilities in his pricing.
Payment for the necessary permanent relocation of public utilities will be under a
provisional sum.
Payment of the Relocation of Public Utilities & Services Pay items:
Item Name Unit
Relocation of Public Utilities & Services From Provisional Sum
1.10 Material Testing
Notwithstanding the requirements stated in the detailed specifications for individual items, the
following minimum tests shall be carried out in the District LGED laboratories and in the field.
In cases there is difficulties, or it is inconvenient to test from LGED laboratory, the tests shall
be performed elsewhere as directed by the Engineer in Charge-in-charge. All test types and
quantities described in the following paras are considered "Normal Testing", whereas anything
beyond that in type and quantity is considered as "Special Testing". The Engineer in Charge
may increase the frequency of testing as required. For Normal Testing the testing frequency
shall be as follows:
1.10.1 Embankment
Item & Types of Tests Test Frequency
i) Plasticity Index (PI) 1 in ≤ 500 running meters for each layer

Page | 9
 ii) 4 days soaked CBR 1 in ≤ 500 running meters for each layer
Maximum dry density (MDD)
iii) 1 in ≤/ 500 running meter for each layer
Modified Proctor
iv) FDD 1 in ≤500 running meter for each layer

1.10.2 Sub-grade
Item & Types of Tests Test Frequency
i) Plasticity Index (PI) 1 in ≤ 500 running meter for each layer
ii) 4 days soaked CBR 1 in ≤ 500 running meter for each layer
iii) Maximum dry density (MDD)
1 in ≤ 500 running meter for each layer
Modified Proctor
iv) FDD 1 in ≤ 500 running meter for each layer

1.10.3 Improved Sub-grade

Item & Types of Tests Test Frequency
i) FM/Gradation 1 in ≤ 500 running meter for each layer
ii) 4 days soaked CBR 1 in ≤ 500 running meter for each layer
iii) Maximum dry density (MDD)
1 in ≤ 500 running meter for each layer
Modified Proctor
iv) FDD 1 in ≤ 300 running meter for each layer

1.10.4 Sub-Base Course

Item & Types of Tests Test Frequency
i) Gradation 1 in ≤ 500 running meter for each layer
ii) 4 days soaked CBR 1 in≤ 500 running meter for each layer
iii) LAA 1 in ≤ 100 running meter for each layer
iv) MDD 1 in≤ 100 running meter for each layer
v) FDD 1 in ≤ 100 running meter for each layer
vi) Water Absorption (Stone/Bricks) 1 in ≤ 100 running meter for each layer

1.10.5 Base Course

Item & Types of Tests Test Frequency
i) Gradation 1 in ≤ 500 running meter for each layer
ii) 4 days soaked CBR 1 in ≤ 500 running meter for each layer
iii) LAA 1 in ≤ 500 running meter for each layer
iv) MDD 1 in ≤ 500 running meter for each layer
v) FDD 1 in≤ 150 running meter for each layer
vi) Water Absorption (Stone/Bricks) 1 in ≤ 500 running meter for each layer

1.10.6 Brick on End Edging

Item & Types of Tests Test Frequency Specified Value
i) Compressive Strength 1 set in 1000m Min 17MPa
ii) Water Absorption 1 set in 1000m Max 15% in 24 hours
1.10.7 HBB

Item & Types of Tests Test Frequency Specified Value

Page | 10
 i) Compressive Strength 1 set in 2000m2 Min 17MPa

ii) Water Absorption 1 set in 2000m2 Max 15% in 24 hours

1.10.8 Reinforced Cement Concrete

1.10.8.1 Cement
Specified Value Specified Value
Item & Types of Tests Test Frequency
CEM-I CEM-II
i) Compressive strength
a). 3 days
1 in 50m3 12 MPa 13 MPa
b). 7 days 19 MPa 20 MPa
c). 28 days 28 MPa 25 MPa
ii) Initial setting time 1 in 50m3 Min 45 min. Min 45 min
iii) Final setting time 1 in 50m3 Max. 375 min Max. 420 min
iv) Fineness (air permeability
1 in 50m3 Min 280m2 / Kg Min 280m2 / Kg
method)
v) Water for Normal
1 in 50m3 26% to 33% 26% to 33%
Consistency
vi) Soundness (expansion) 1 in 50m3 ≤ 10 mm ≤ 10 mm

1.10.8.2 Aggregate

Item & Types of Tests Test Frequency Specified Value

i) In Accordance with
FM of sand 1 in 50m3
2.7.2.3 of these Spec.
ii) In Accordance with
LAA 1 in 50m3
2.8.2.4 of these Spec
iii) In Accordance with
Gradation of CA (stone chips) 1 in 50m3
2.8.2.4 of these Spec
iv) In Accordance with
Specific Gravity of CA (stone chips) 1 in 50m3
2.8.2.4 of these Spec
v) In Accordance with
Water Absorption of CA (stone chips) 1 in 50m3
2.8.2.4 of these Spec
1.10.8.3 Concrete
ITEM & TYPES OF TESTS TEST FREQUENCY
CONCRETE
i) Compressive strength 1 in 50m3 or part
ii) Hourly during concreting or as directed by the
Slump Engineer in Charge

1.10.8.4 Reinforcement
Steel for the reinforcement of concrete shall be Ribbed bars made from billets and
conforming to the requirements of BDS ISO 6935-2: 2016 or the latest such equivalent
standard subsequently released from BSTI.
Only test Certificates issued by BUET, KUET, RUET, CUET or DUET shall be accepted by
the Engineer in Charge.
Item & Types of Tests Test Frequency Specified Value
i) In Accordance with
Diameter 1 set/dia / 10,000kg
2.8.2.6 of these Spec

Page | 11
 ii) In Accordance with
Unit Weight 1 set/dia / 10,000kg
2.8.2.6 of these Spec
iii) In Accordance with
Elongation 1 set/dia / 10,000kg
2.8.2.6 of these Spec
iv) Tensile Properties In Accordance with
1 set/dia / 10,000kg
2.8.2.6 of these Spec
v) In Accordance with
Bending Properties 1 set/dia / 10,000kg
2.8.2.6 of these Spec

1.10.9 Bituminous Material

The contractor shall provide the Engineer in Charge with Manufactures Certificates relating to
separate batches of bituminous material (Penetration Grade 60/70) provided for sealing and
surfacing operations. Only test Certificates issued by BUET, KUET, RUET, CUET or DUET
shall be accepted by the Engineer in Charge.
Item & Types of Tests Test Frequency Specified Value
i) Penetration 100gm, 0.1mm in 5 sec
1 in 7500m2
at 25oC
ii) Specific Gravity 1 in 7500m2 1.05 to 1.01
iii) Softening Point 1 in 10,000m2 48oC to 56oC
iv) Flash Point & Fire Point 1 in 10,000m2 250oC
v) Solubility 99% by wt. in Carbon
1 in 750m2
Tetrachloride

1.10.10 Brick Works

Item & Types of Tests Test Frequency Specified Value

i) Compressive Strength of
1set per 300m3 Min. 17 MPa
individual brick
ii) Unit Weight of bricks 1set per 300m3 1200 Kg/m3
iii) Water Absorption of bricks 1set per 300m3 Max 15%
iv) Efflorescence of bricks 1set per 300m3 slight to nil
v) FM of sand In Accordance with
1set per 300m3
2.7.2.3 of these Spec.
vi) Compressive strength of cement 1set per 300m3 In Accordance with
a). 3 days 1.10.8.1 of these Spec
b). 7 days
c). 28 days
vii) Initial setting time of cement 1set per 300m3 In Accordance with
1.10.8.1 of these Spec
viii) Final setting time of cement 1set per 300m3 In Accordance with
1.10.8.1 of these Spec

1.10.11 Payment
Normal Testing
(a) The cost of providing and transporting samples to the Laboratory specified by
the Engineer in Charge shall be borne by the contractor.
Special Testing

(a) All tests instructed by the Engineer in Charge in type and quantity beyond those

Page | 12
 specified shall be paid to the contractor.
(b) The cost of these tests is covered by a provisional sum. Only in case of failure of
the test results to meet the required Specifications, the cost will be charged to the
contractor.

Page | 13
 SECTION-2

CONCRETE STRUCTURE
2 CONCRETE STRUCTURE
2.1 DESCRIPTION
This work consists of furnishing and construction of roadside drain, drain with footpath
and drainage of other structures including RCC piping, cleaning boxes, catch basins,
concrete drains, erosion protection, inserts, fittings and other incidental parts necessary to
provide for further supports of drains in accordance with the lines, levels, grades, sizes,
dimensions and types shown on the Drawings.
2.2 PREPARATION OF SITE
2.2.1 Description
This item shall consist of clearing off of the site from rubbish of all kinds including superfluous
earth, weeds, grass etc.; cutting and uprooting of trees of all girth; removal of drain, sewers or
any other services, levelling, if necessary, and removal of surplus materials and debris to safe
distance as directed by Engineer-in Charge.
2.2.2 Construction Requirements
Before setting out of new work and commencing foundation work, the site must be cleaned off
from all those described above. On clearance of site, it should be roughly levelled off as
required.
The trees shall be cut and their roots totally up-rooted as directed by the Engineer-in Charge.
No tree should be cut unless it is absolutely unavoidable. All serviceable materials obtained
from the clearing will be the property of the City Corporation or any other competent authority
as determined by the Engineer in Charge. Salvaged material may be handed over by the
Contractor to the local authority on instruction from the Engineer in Charge.
2.2.3 Basis of Payment
There is no separate item for Preparation of the Site in the Bill of Quantities. The Contractor
will not be entitled to any separate payment. The cost of this work and other incidental works
shall be included in the unit price of all other pay items included in the Contract.
2.3 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
2.3.1 Description
This work shall consist of all clearing and grubbing necessary for the performance of the work
covered by the Contract in accordance with the Specification.
The clearing and grubbing shall consist of clearing the designated areas of all down timber,
vegetation, rubbish, topsoil, other organic and objectionable materials and shall include
grubbing roots, stumps, grass, weeds, rubbish and disposing of all material resulting from the
clearing and grubbing. It shall also include the demolition, removal and disposal of structures
that obtrude the work.
2.3.2 Preservation of Property
The contractor is responsible for preservation and protection of property, trees, shrubs,
gardens and landscape and liable to compensate damage claims, if any.

2.3.3 Methods of Execution

2.3.3.1 Clearing

Page | 14
 Clearing shall consist of the removal and disposal of everything above ground level including
overhanging branches except those things the Engineer in Charge directs are to be left
undisturbed. The material to be cleared shall include but not necessarily be limited to trees,
stumps, logs, bush, undergrowth, grass, crops, loose vegetable matter and structures unless
provided elsewhere. Within the limits of earthworks tree stumps shall be completely removed.
Clearing shall also include the removal of existing fences, remnants of buildings, pavements,
etc.
2.3.3.2 Grubbing
The original ground surface shall be disturbed as little as possible. Grubbing shall, therefore,
be confined to major roots beneath the road embankment, ditches, canal diversions and footing
excavations. Topsoil shall be removed as agreed with the Engineer in Charge and will be
measured as roadway excavation. Grubbing beneath the embankment shall be as per at the
direction of the Engineer in Charge.
2.3.3.3 Ownership of Cleared Material
All cleared material shall, unless otherwise provided for in the Contract, be the property of the
Department.
2.3.3.4 Disposal of Cleared Material
Cleared material which is not required will be known as waste. Waste shall be the property of
the Contractor. Waste shall be removed from the Site by the Contractor and shall be disposed
of by the Contractor at his own expense.
2.2.3.5 Measurement and Payment
Clearing and grubbing will be paid at sqm. The payment shall be full compensation for
furnishing all labour, materials, tools, equipment and incidental necessary to do the work and
for doing all the clearing and grubbing in the designated area or as directed by the Engineer in
Charge included the removal and disposal of all resulting material.
Payment of the Cleaning & Grabbing shall be Pay item:

Item Name Unit

Clearing and Grubbing Square meter

2.4 DISMANTLING OF EXISTING/DAMAGED STRUCTURE

2.4.1 Description
This work shall consist of the satisfactory dismantling, removal and disposal or salvage, wholly
or in part, of all the existing structures, substructures, bridges buildings, culverts etc., within
the Site as indicated on the Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer in Charge.
All properties within the Site may have been removed by the owners before the Contractor
takes occupation of the site. All remaining fences, buildings, structures, encumbrances of any
character, except those still to be removed or ordered to be salvaged upon or within the limits
of the Site, shall be removed by the Contractor and placed carefully on the abutting property,
or otherwise disposed of as directed by the Engineer in Charge. Materials so removed, including
any existing steel bridges, drain or pipes of culvert, which the Engineer in Charge may order
salvaged, shall be carefully removed and shall become the property of the City Corporation.
Where a structure is to be replaced, the existing structure shall be demolished to the level of
foundation of the new structure or as directed by the Engineer in Charge. All material obtained
from the demolished structures shall be removed except as otherwise specified or directed by
the Engineer in Charge. For all other areas that will be used for any other purpose except for

Page | 15
 roadways, existing structures shall be demolished to a level lower than the lowest elevation of
the finished ground level as indicated on the Drawings or as provided by the Specifications
except as otherwise directed by the Engineer in Charge.
2.4.2 Materials
Removed materials shall be the property of the City Corporation unless otherwise stated in the
Contract. Any materials not required by the City Corporation shall be classed as a waste and
shall be disposed of by the Contractor at his own expense.
2.4.3 Methods of Execution
If the superstructure any portion of the structure is deemed fit for use elsewhere, the usable
portions shall be marked and removed without damage and stockpiled neatly at an accessible
point. Recovered structural steelwork and Bailey bridge components shall, on the instructions
of the Engineer in Charge, be removed from site to the City Corporation/Pourashava office
compound as directed by the Engineer in Charge. All other usable materials shall be neatly
stockpiled within the site at points approved by the Engineer in Charge.
All material which is not considered of value by the Engineer in Charge shall be removed by
the contractor from within the limits of the Site at his own expense. Use of explosives will not
be permitted except on direction of the Engineer in Charge.
2.4.4 Measurement and Payment
Dismantling of Existing/Damaged Structure like buildings, bridges, culverts, etc. and removal
shall be paid for. The payment shall be full compensation for dismantling, removal and disposal
of all materials including labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the
work.
The Pay item shall be:

Item Name Unit

Dismantling and Removal of Existing/Damaged Structures Cubic meter

2.5 EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION

2.5.1 Description
This item of work shall consist of excavation in any type of soil/ material for the foundation of
structures, disposal of excavated materials, construction and removal of sheeting and other
temporary works in protecting the stability and safety of the excavated foundations, pumping,
bailing water from foundations, back-filling of completed structures with suitable back-fill.
No separate payment shall be made for the excavation and back-fill for structures when the
works involve the use of temporary works in protecting the stability and safety of the excavated
foundations. The costs of this temporary work shall be deemed included as part of the Tender
sum. The Work shall be carried out at the locations and according to the lines, levels, grades,
and dimensions shown on the Drawings and as directed by the Engineer in Charge.
2.5.2 Excavation
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in Charge before commencing excavation of the
foundation trenches so that the cross-section, elevations and measurements of the undisturbed
ground may be taken. The natural ground adjacent to the structure shall not be disturbed without
getting permission from the Engineer in Charge. Trenches and foundation pits for structures
shall be excavated to the lines, grades and elevations as shown on the Drawings or as directed
by the Engineer in Charge. The elevations of the bottom of the foundations shown on the
Drawings are approximate only and the Engineer in Charge may order such changes as deemed

Page | 16
 necessary to provide a secured foundation.
Where unstable soil is encountered at the bed level, it should be brought to the notice of
Engineer in Charge and all such unstable soil shall be removed as directed and replaced with
suitable materials to provide adequate support for the structure.
On acceptance of the materials forming the bottom of any excavation by the Engineer in Charge
subsequently becoming unacceptable to him / her due to exposure to weather condition or due
to flooding or have become puddled, soft or loose during the work process, the Contractor shall
remove such damaged softened, or loose materials and excavate additional. Such further
excavation shall be held as excess excavation and the cost of the excess excavation and
subsequent replacement with a suitable back-fill shall be at the expenses of the Contractor.
Any erroneous excavation or excess excavation for the conveniences of the Contractor, or over
excavation performed by the Contractor for any purpose or reasons shall be at the expenses of
the Contractor. If the excavation for foundations exceeds the depths specified, the Contractor
shall bring it back to the specified levels with sand, mass concrete or other approved materials
conforming to sub-section 4.3.6 of these specifications at the Contractor’s own expenses.
Excavation shall be sufficiently large to provide necessary working space, shuttering and any
other Temporary Works required during construction.
In excavating foundation trenches, the last 150mm layer shall not be excavated until
immediately before commencing the construction work except that the Engineer in Charge shall
permit otherwise. Any damage to the work due to the Contractor’s operation shall be repaired
at the expenses of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safety and stability of the excavation and
shall provide all protective supports, bracing, sheet piles, shoring etc. as required. Shoring
should be adequate to provide enough safety to all the adjacent structures and land.
Excavated materials, classified as suitable for fill, shall be stockpiled. Waste materials and
suitable filling materials in excess of requirement shall be disposed of by the Contractor outside
the limits of the site.
The foundation material shall be cleared of all loose and displaced materials and cut to a firm
surface, either leveled, stepped, or serrated, as specified or shown on the Drawing or directed
by the Engineer in Charge leaving a smooth solid bed to receive foundation.
No footing, bedding material or structure shall be placed on any foundation until the Engineer
in Charge has inspected and approved the depth of excavation and the foundation materials.
2.5.3 Disposal of Excavated Material
All excavated material, so far accepted by the Engineer in Charge as suitable, shall be utilized
as back-fill or embankment-fill. The surplus materials shall be termed as waste.
Excavated materials, suitable for use as back-fill, shall be deposited by the Contractor in spoil
heaps at points convenient for re-handling of the materials during the back-filling operations.
Excavated materials shall be deposited in such places and in such a manner as not to cause
damage to roads, services or properties either within or outside the project area and so as to
cause no impediment to the drainage of the site or surrounding areas. The location of spoil
heaps shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer in Charge. Waste materials shall be
disposed of in accordance with the instruction of the Engineer in Charge
2.5.4 Pumping and Bailing
The foundation shall be kept free from water at all times during the construction period. The
ground water level shall be maintained at a minimum of 0.9m below the lowest designed
excavation level.

Page | 17
 Pumping and bailing from any foundation shall be done so as to preclude the possibility of the
movement of water through or alongside any concrete being placed. No pumping or bailing
will be permitted during the placing of concrete and for at least 24 hours thereafter, unless it is
done from a suitable sump separated from the concrete work by a watertight wall or from well
points.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible and include in his rates all costs in providing all
equipment and accessories required for de-watering. The rates shall also include cost for
transportation, furnishing, installation, safe operation and maintaining of the system including
operators, mechanics, the supply of power, fuel, lubricants, spares, repairing, etc. throughout
and the removal of the equipment at the end of the construction period under this Contract.
Excavations shall be as dry as possible prior to and during placing concrete. Concrete, placing
under water will only be permitted if indicated on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer
in Charge.
2.5.5 Measurement
All required and accepted excavation including excavation of unsuitable soil shall be measured
for payment in its original position and the volume determined in cubic meters by the end area
method as computed from the original and final geometric cross sections of the required and
completed work.
2.5.6 Payment
The quantities of excavation measured as specified above will be paid for at the Contract unit
price per cubic meter. Such price shall include excavation, shaping and completion of all
surfaces and for furnishing all labour, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals to complete
the work including handling of excavated materials stock piling and disposing off surplus
excavated materials to a place as directed by the Engineer in Charge.
Excavation in suitable material which is to be used for backfilling material shall not be
measured separately.
The above price and payment shall be full compensation for work involved in performing the
excavation completely as shown on the Drawings and as specified in these Specifications and
as directed by the Engineer in Charge, including the cost of temporary stockpiling, selecting
and protecting the materials to be reused.
Pay item shall be:

Item name Unit

Excavation in any classified material and disposal of spoil to fill

(i) Cubic meter
in embankment, stockpile or otherwise.

(ii) Roadway excavation (Picking up flat soling and HBB) Square meter

(iii) Roadway excavation in Edging linear meter

(iv) Roadway excavation in sub-base, base, WBM & RCC pavement Cubic meter

2.6 BLINDING CONCRETE

2.6.1 Description
Blinding concrete shall be placed above backfill as shown on the Drawings or ordered by the
Engineer in Charge. No reinforcement will be used in blinding concrete. The curing shall be

Page | 18
 done for 7 days minimum; Wooden or steel tempers or rammers in lieu of vibrators may be
used for compaction of the cement concrete. The proportion for blinding concrete shall be 1:3:6
with minimum compressive strength of 10 MPa at 28 days on standard cylindrical test. The
material shall conform to the specifications stated below:
2.6.2 Cement:
Cement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO/ASTM conforming to BDS EN 197-1
CEM-II/B-M and in accordance with sub-section 2.7.2.2 of these Specifications.
2.6.3 Coarse aggregate:
Coarse aggregate shall be 20mm downgraded crushed bricks chips LAA value not exceeding
38. The Brick chips shall be made from first class bricks or picked Jhama bricks. The brick
chips shall be crushed bricks or picked Jhama and shall comply with Clause 2.7.2.1 of these
Specifications. Bricks aggregate shall be as far practically as possible of uniform specific
gravity. Brown bricks or ununiformly burnt bricks shall not be crushed for the purpose of
providing aggregates. Best possible first class or picked Jhama bricks of selected quality only
shall be allowed to be crushing. All brick aggregates shall have to screened and washed at
contractor’s own cost. Bricks aggregates shall consist of clean, well- shaped cubical particles,
free from splintered and flaky particles, soil, organic matter or any deleterious material.
Nominal Size 20mm Downgraded Coarse Aggregate for Concrete
Sieve Size (mm) % passing by weight
25 100
20 90-100
9.5 20-55
4.75 0-15
2.36 0-5

2.6.4 Fine aggregate:

Fine aggregate shall be sand of minimum FM 1.2. Fine aggregate shall be as specified in sub-
section 2.7.2.3

2.6.5 Water:
The water for washing aggregate and mixing concrete shall be clean, potable and free from
objectionable quantities of silt, organic matter, alkali, salt, acids and other impurities. Sufficient
water storage facilities shall be provided to ensure the continuous operation of concrete placing.
The Water used in mixing concrete shall be saline/chloride content in water for construction
shall not exceed 500 ppm (parts per million). The methods of delivering and storing water shall
be subject to the approval of the Engineer in Charge.
2.6.6 Payment
The amount of completed and accepted work, as mentioned above shall be paid for at the quoted
unit price and payment shall be for full compensation of all materials, labour including
preparation of bed laying of polythene transport, batching, mixing, pouring, compacting and
curing etc. necessary to complete the item according to the drawing and direction of the
Engineer in Charge.
2.6.7 The Pay item shall be:
Item Name Unit

Lean/blinding concrete in foundation Cubic meter

Page | 19
2.7 BRICKWORKS
2.7.1 Description
This work shall consist of the construction, reconstruction, rehabilitation, face work repairs
and repointing of brickwork structures, also the construction of brick drainage layers, in
accordance with these Specifications and the lines, levels, grades, dimensions and
locations shown on the Drawings or as required by the Engineer in Charge.
2.7.2 Materials
2.7.2.1 First Class Brick
First class bricks shall be made from good brick earth free from saline deposits and shall be
sand molded. They shall be thoroughly burnt by coal/gas without being vitrified, of uniform
and good colour, shall be regular and uniform in size, shape and texture with sharp square edges
and parallel faces. They must be homogeneous in texture and emit a clear metallic ringing
sound when struck one against the other. They shall be free from flaws, cracks, chips, stones,
modules of lime or canker and other blemishes. A first-Class Brick shall not break when struck
with another brick or when dropped in T-position on hard ground from a height of about 1.2m.
A first-Class Brick shall not absorb more than 15% of its dry weight of water after being soaked
for 24 hours and shall show no sign of efflorescence on drying.
First Class Bricks shall have the dimensions after burning: 240mm x 115mm x 70mm. The unit
weight of first-class bricks shall be a minimum of 1200 kg per m3. The compressive strength
of individual bricks shall be minimum 17MPa. The allowable variations in dimensions are.
i) Length: not more than 6mm
ii) Breadth: not more than 5mm
iii) Height: not more than 1.5mm
Picked Jhama Bricks
Picked Jhama bricks are over burn first class bricks, uniformly vitrified throughout with good
shape, hard, slightly black in colour and without cracks. The vitrified mass shall not become
porous or spongy as a result of over burning. The compressive strength of picked jhama shall
not be less than 18 MPa. All other requirements for first class bricks shall apply to picked jhama
except dimensions. The picked jhama Bricks may have dimensions slightly below first-class
bricks but not less than 235mm x 110mm x 70mm. The unit weight of shall not be less than
1200 kg per m3.
2.7.2.2 Cement
Cement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO/ASTM conforming to BDS EN 197-1
CEM-II/B-M.
Bagged or bulk cement which has partially set, or which contains lumps of caked cement shall
be rejected. The use of cement reclaimed from discarded or used bags shall not be permitted.
Cement shall be delivered in bags as packed by the Manufacturer with BSTI Certification mark
with logo, number of Bangladesh Standard, name of the manufacturer, name and type of
cement, strength class, main constituents by %, weight of bag packed with cement,
day/month/year of manufacture, and country of origin. The composition of cement shall be in
accordance with Table below.
Composition of Cement
Type of Cement Main Constituents (% by mass) Minor

Page | 20
 (Notation) Clinker Blast Silica Pozzol Fly ash Burnt Lime additional
furnac fume ana Siliceou Shale stone constituen
e slag s ts (%)
(K) (S) (D) (T) (L)
(P-Q) (V-W)
Portland
cement CEM I 95 to100 Nil 0 to 5

CEM
65 to 79 21 to 35 0 to 5
Portland- II B-M
composit
e cement CEM II 80 to 94
6 to 20 0 to 5
A-M

Mechanical and Physical Properties

The cement shall conform to the following mechanical and physical properties as shown in
Table below.
Sl.No Property Applicable Test Standard Requirement
Method CEM-II CEM-I
1 Compressive strength
a). 3 days 13 MPa 12 MPa
ASTM C109
b). 7 days 20 MPa 19 MPa
c). 28 days 25 MPa 28 MPa
2 Initial setting time ASTM C191 Not less than 45 Not less than 45
min min.
3 Final setting time Not more than 420 Not more than
ASTM C191
min. 375 min.
4 Fineness (air Minimum Minimum
ASTM C204
permeability method) 280m2/Kg 280m2/Kg
5 Water for Normal
ASTM C187 26% to 33% 26% to 33%
Consistency
6 Soundness (expansion) BDS/ASTM/
≤ 10 mm ≤ 10 mm
AASHTO
Chemical Requirement
The properties of cement shall conform to the requirements listed below.
Test parameters Applicable Test Standard Requirement
Method %
Silicon Dioxide (SiO2) C-114 20.00 min
Alumina Oxide (Al2O3) C-114 6.00 max
Ferric Oxide (Fe2O3) C-114 6.00 max
Magnesium Oxide (MgO) C-114 6.00 max
Sulphur Trioxide (SO3) C-114 3.5 max
Loss on ignition C-114 5.00 max
Insoluble residue C-114 5.00 max
Lime (CaO) C-114 N/A
Tricalcium Silicate (C3S) C-114 N/A

Page | 21
 Dicalcium Silicate (C2S) C-114 N/A
Tricalcium Aluminate (C 3A) C-114 8.0 ax
2.7.2.3 Fine Aggregate
Fine aggregate for concrete and masonry works shall be non-saline clean natural sand and have
a specific gravity not less than 2.6 and conforms to the requirement of ASTM C-144. It shall
be angular, hard and durable, free from clay, mica and soft flaky substances. All sand shall be
well washed and clean before use. A well graded sand shall be used for concrete as it adds to
the density of the mortar and concrete. Sands required for brick works needs to be finer than
concrete works.
Sand which contains 90% of the particle size greater than 0.06mm and less than 0.2mm is fine
sand. On the other hand, sand which contains 90% of particle size greater than 0.60mm and
less than 2mm is coarse sand. The supply method and stock piling of sand shall be such as to
permit ready identification of the material delivered and shall be approved by the Engineer in
Charge. Fine aggregate from different sources of supply shall not be mixed and stored in the
same stockpile nor used alternately in the work without permission from the Engineer in
Charge.
Fine aggregate shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of organic impurities. Deleterious
material shall not exceed the following percentage by weight.
Clay Lumps and friable particles - maximum 3%
Coal and Lignite 0.25%
Material passing the 0.075mm (No. 200) sieve 0-8%
Shale, coal, soft or flaky fragments 1%
Sulfur compounds 0.3%
Organic material content Nil
Mica content 1.5%
Fine aggregate shall be well graded from coarse to fine and shall conform to the following
Fineness Modulus:
For Concrete : 1.80 to 2.50
For Mortar : 1.20
For Filling sand : 0.80
2.7.2.4 Water
The water used in mixing and curing concrete shall be tested by methods described in
ASTM-C1602/C-1602M-12. All water shall be clean and free from salt, oil, acid,
vegetable, or other substance injurious to the finished product. The use of river water will
be subject to the approval of the Engineer in Charge. Such approvals may be withdrawn
from time to time depending on the condition of the river. The saline/chloride content in
water for construction shall not exceed 500 ppm (parts per million)
2.7.3 Specifications for Mortar
Cement mortar shall consist of a mixture of one part by weight of cement to four parts by
weight of sand. The cement and sand shall be mixed dry and in the specified proportion
until the colour of the mixture is uniform. Approved water shall then be added sparingly,
only the minimum necessary being used to produce a workable mixture of normal
consistency. The water/cement ratio in no case shall exceed 50% by weight, or as
directed by the Engineer in Charge. The mixing shall be done on a clean board or platform
with tied joints, to avoid leakage. At the close of each day’s work the mixing trough and
pans shall be thoroughly cleaned. Cement mortar shall be mixed in such quantities as can
be used in the work within 30 minutes. Mortar, which has taken initial set, shall not be
used nor shall it be remixed with fresh mortar and such mortar shall be discarded and

Page | 22
 removed from the working site.
2.7.4 Construction Methods
2.7.4.1 Workmanship
Brickwork shall be built plumbed, curved or battered as shown on the Drawings or as may
be required, by properly supervised skilled masons and workmen. Bricks shall be cleaned
and if necessary, they shall be scrubbed. Bricks shall be soaked in water for at least three
hours before use.
Where new work joins previous work, the latter shall be well cleaned and thoroughly
watered. All facework bricks shall be specially selected regarding size, shape and edges.
Unless otherwise specified bricks shall be laid in English Bond, with frogs upward. All
horizontal joints shall be parallel and level. Vertical joints in alternate courses shall come
directly over one another. Joint thickness shall be 6 mm and shall in no case exceed 8
mm. The height of four courses including 4 bed joints shall rise 300 mm. Walls shall
always be carried up regularly along their entire length throughout the structure unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer in Charge. The brickwork shall be cured for at least
seven days. Fixtures such as clamps, pipe brackets etc. shall be provided in the brickwork
during execution.
2.7.5 Measurement
Brickwork shall be measured by the number of cubic metres that is ordered, placed and
accepted. In computing quantities, the dimensions of brickwork shown on the Drawings
for new work and extensions shall be used as the basis for measurement. Remedial
repairs of defective brick and replacement of defective brickwork shall also be measured
by the number of cubic metres ordered as indicated on the Drawings or marked up and
accepted. No measurements will be taken on the defective brickwork that it is necessary to
remove. The repointing of existing brickwork joints shall be measured by the number of
square metres of repointing that is ordered, marked up and accepted. No measurements will
be taken on the amount of defective mortar it is necessary to remove.
No measurements will be taken of any temporary works.
2.7.6 Payment
The work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the Contract unit prices per
cubic metre of brickwork or square metre of repointing.
The Contractor’s rates shall include for all temporary measures to retain structural
adequacy of an existing structure; all preparatory work in breaking out defective brickwork
and removal of the same; for mixing mortar; for placing brickwork on/against prepared
surfaces to the lines, levels as indicated on the Drawings or as instructed by the
Engineer in Charge; for finished joints in a neat and professional manner. The
Contractor’s rates shall be fully inclusive of all cost of labour and materials in providing
brickwork with sound mortar joints that will satisfy the structural criteria of the elements of
the whole.
The Contractor shall be paid at the Contract unit rate for tie bars and pattress plates
installed and accepted.
The Pay item shall be:
Item name Unit
New and Extended Brickwork Cubic Meter
Replacement of Defective Existing Cubic Meter
Brickwork
2.8 REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE

Page | 23
2.8.1 Description
This work shall consist of construction of all Portland Cement Concrete in structures, with
reinforcement, which shall involve furnishing, placing, finishing, and curing of concrete. All items
of concrete work shall include elements of structures constructed by cast-in-place and pre-cast
methods using either plain, or reinforced concrete or any combination thereof and shall conform to
these specifications and requirements. All structures shall be built in a workman like manner to the
lines, grades and dimensions shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer in Charge.
All concrete works shall be carried out in accordance with the current British Standard BS 8110 or
AASHTO M-241 or ASTM C-685 and as specified by the Engineer in Charge.
All sampling and testing of constituent materials shall be carried out in accordance with the
provisions of the appropriate BDS Standard and all sampling and testing of fresh and hardened
concrete shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of BS 1881 “Method of Testing
Concrete” or similar under AASHTO T 22 or ASTM C 39.
2.8.2 Materials
2.8.2.1 Cement
Cement shall conform to the requirements of Bangladesh Standard (BDS) Specification EN 197-1:
2003 or ASTM C-150 or similar approved standard. The cement shall fulfill the requirements as
mentioned in sub-section 2.7.2.2.
Cement of different manufacturers and with different brands or types shall be kept separately and
shall not be used in the same mix. Consignment of cement shall be used in the order of delivery.
Only one brand, grade or kind of cement shall be used in a given structure, except upon the written
permission of the Engineer in Charge.
2.8.2.2 Water
Water shall fulfill the requirements as mentioned in sub-section 2.7.2.4.
2.8.2.3 Fine Aggregate
Fine Aggregate shall fulfill the requirements as mentioned in sub-section 2.7.2.3.
In addition to the specifications mentioned above for reinforced cement concrete the fine
aggregate shall have the following graduation.
Sieve Size (mm) % passing by weight
9.500 100
4.750 95-100
2.360 80-100
1.180 50-85
0.600 25-60
0.300 5-30
0.150 0-10
2.8.2.4 Coarse Aggregate (Stone Chips)
Coarse aggregates shall consist of clean, hard, strong, dense, non-porous and durable pieces of
crushed stone and conform to BDS 243:1963 (Coarse and Fine Aggregate from Natural Sources
for Concrete 1) or ASTM C 33: (Concrete Aggregates). The large size boulders that shall be
crushed and to be used for coarse aggregate in concrete shall be composed of limestone,
sandstone, granite, trap rock or rock of similar nature and shall have the following properties:
Compressive strength (minimum): 49 MPa (5000 psi)
Specific gravity: 2.4-2.7

Page | 24
 Unit weights: 2245 – 2566 km/m3
Porosity: 2.00 – 6.00 percent
Water absorption (maximum): 1.5 – 5 % by weight
Flakiness Index: Not exceeding 30% as per BS- 1241
The boulder shall be of uniform light colour as approved by the Engineer in Charge and shall
be free of thin laminations, adherent coatings, and deleterious substances.
For RCC the LAA of coarse aggregate shall be maximum 30. The Coarse aggregates shall be
20mm down well graded crushed stone chips broken from boulders. Nominal size 20mm
downgraded coarse aggregate for concrete shall be as follows:
Sieve Size (mm) % passing by weight
25 100
19.5 90-100
9.5 20-55
4.75 0-10
2.36 0-5

The grading of coarse aggregate after breaking shall be such that when combined with the
approved fine aggregate and cement, it shall produce a workable concrete of maximum density.
Aggregate pieces shall be angular in shape and have granular or crystalline or smooth but not
glossy non-powdery surfaces. Maximum deleterious substances that shall not exceed or coarse
aggregate are as follows:

Material Mass percentage

Soft fragments 2.00
Clay lump 0.25
Material passing 0.075mm sieve 0.50 for clay 1.50 for fracture dust
Flakiness Index less than 30

Coarse aggregate shall be stored at site in such a manner that it is not contaminated by fine
aggregate, earth or any other material. Adequate precautions shall be taken to segregation of
the coarse aggregate while it is being transport and stacked.
Nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate in concrete shall not be larger than:
a). One-fifth of the narrowest dimensions between sides of forms; or
b). One-third the depth of slabs; or
c). Three-fourth the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or wires,
bundles of bars.
2.8.2.5 Admixtures
All chemical admixtures for use in concrete shall fulfill the requirements of ASTM-C-494.
They shall be delivered in sealed watertight containers, marked the property name of the
admixture, net weight and volume, manufacturing and expiry date, non-aggressiveness to
environment etc., ASTM-C-494 classified concrete admixtures from A to G depending on
purposes of use. The selection of a type of admixture depends upon the requirement and
condition where concrete is to be done.
Type-A:
Water reducing chemical admixture, complying to ASTM-C -494 Type-A of approved
brand/origin/manufacturer, and supplied by only manufacturer’s authorized dealer with
certificate of origin may be used. Type A admixture reduces quantity of mixing water to

Page | 25
 improve workability of concrete i.e., produce concrete of given consistency.

Type-B:
Retarding chemical admixture, complying to ASTM-C -494 Type-B of approved
brand/origin/manufacturer, and supplied by only manufacturer’s authorized dealer with
certificate of origin may be used to retard the setting time of concrete, i.e., reducing
shrinkage in concrete specially for concrete laid in thick layers and intended delayed
construction for improved construction joints, re-concreting etc.,

Type-C:
Accelerating chemical admixture in concrete, complying to ASTM-C -494 Type-C of approved
brand/origin/manufacturer, and supplied by only manufacturer’s authorized dealer with
certificate of origin may be used to accelerate the setting time of concrete, i.e., to gain early
strength of concrete specially for concrete laid where there is chance of watering and have
urgency to open for traffic.

Type-D:
Water reducing and retarding chemical admixture, complying with ASTM-C -494 Type-D of
approved brand/origin/manufacturer and supplied by only manufacturer’s authorized dealer
with certificate of origin may be used. Type D admixture reduces quantity of mixing water to
improve workability of concrete and produce concrete of given consistency at low water
cement ration. It also retards the setting time of concrete.

Type-E
Water reducing and accelerating chemical admixture, complying with ASTM-C -494 Type-E
of approved brand/origin/manufacturer, and supplied by only manufacturer’s authorized dealer
with certificate of origin may be used. Type E admixture reduces quantity of mixing water to
improve workability of concrete and produce concrete of given consistency at low water
cement ration. It also accelerates the setting time of concrete.

Type-F:
Water reducing high range chemical admixture in concrete, complying with ASTM-C -494
Type-F of approved brand/origin/manufacturer, and supplied by only manufacturer’s
authorized dealer with certificate of origin. It reduces the quantity of mixing water required to
produce concrete of a given consistency by 12 or greater (flowing concrete) and for higher
strength of concrete.
2.8.2.6 Reinforcement
Steel for the reinforcement of concrete shall be ribbed or deformed bar conform to BDS ISO
6935-2:2016 ASTM A-615M-88 & ASTM A-706 or the latest of such equivalent standards of
specification.
Certificate from the manufacturer shall be submitted by the contractor to the Engineer in Charge
to indicate compliance with the requirement of the specifications and to conform that the steel
bars are made from billets. Preferred delivery length of straight bars is 12m or 18m with
permissible deviation of ±1 metre. All reinforcing bars shall be identified by marks introduced
during rolling which shall indicate.
i) Steel grade
ii) Name of the manufacturer
Dimension, Masses and Tolerances
Dimension masses and tolerances are shown in Table below:
Mass per length (metre)

Page | 26
 Nominal bar Nominal cross Requirement
Permissible deviation
diameter (mm) sectional area (kg)
(%)
(sq.mm)
4 12.6 0.99 ±8
6 28.3 0.222 ±8
8 50.3 0.395 ±8
10 78.5 0.616 ±5
12 113 0.888 ±5
16 201 1.579 ±5
20 314 2.466 ±5
22 380 2.98 ±4
25 491 3.854 ±4
28 616 4.83 ±4
32 804 6.313 ±4
40 1256 9.864 ±4

Geometry of Ribs
Ribbed bars must have transverse ribs. Longitudinal ribs are optional. The geometry of ribs shall
ensure that bars have adequate bond properties to fulfill their functions in concrete structures. The
bond properties are adequate if there are at least two rows of transverse ribs equally distributed
around the perimeter. The transverse ribs within each row shall be distributed uniformly over the
entire length of the bar, except in the area of marking.

Chemical Composition
Ribbed or deformed bar shall meet the following ISO-6935 chemical composition.

Silicon % Manganese Phosphorous Sulpher

Steel Grade Carbon % ©
(Si) % (Mn) % (P) %S

Grade-400 (400 W) 0.22 Max 0.60 Max 1.60 Max 0.50 Max 0.50 Max

Grade-500 (500 W) 0.24 Max 0.65 Max 1.70 Max 0.055 Max 0.055 Max

Tensile Properties
Required tensile properties for the ribbed or deformed steel bar according to ISO-6892 is
given in the Table below.

Minimum yield Tested Ultimate strength. Min elongation Min total elongation
Steel Grade at Max. force
strength MPa Tested Yield strength after fracture

Grade-300
300 At least 1.25 17% 8%
(RB 300)

Grade-400
400 At least 1.25 17% 8%
(400 W)

Grade-500
500 At least 1.25 13% 8%
(500 W)

Page | 27
 Bending Properties
The bend test shall be carried out according to ISO 10065. The test piece shall be bent to
an angle between 160o to 180o over a mandrel of the diameter specified in Table. After
testing none of the test pieces shall show fractures or cracks visible to the naked eye.
Nominal diameter
Grade-300 (RB 300) Grade-400 (400 W) Grade-500 (500 W)
of bar
6 12.5mm 16mm 20mm
8 16mm 20mm 25mm
10 20mm 25mm 32mm
12 32mm 40mm 50mm
16 50mm 63mm 80mm
20 63mm 80mm 100mm
25 100mm 125mm 160mm
32 125mm 160mm 200mm
40 160mm 200mm 250mm
2.8.3 Composition of Concrete
2.8.3.1 Concrete Classes
This work shall consist of manufacturing concrete for all, or part of the structure of required
grade and type as provided in these Specifications and of the form, dimensions, lines, grades,
and design shown on the plans. Concrete shall consist of a mixture of Portland cement, fine and
coarse aggregate, and water. The proportions in which the various ingredients shall be used in
the concrete mix for various work shall be designed in accordance with the specified strength
and suitable workability. The Contractor shall follow the standards of BDS and American
Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) for materials and BNBC 93 and Building Code
Requirements for Reinforced Concrete ACI 318-08 for Specification of works. In case of
differences between specifications contained in this book and those of ASTM/ACI/BDS/BNBC,
the specifications specified in this book shall stand. Concrete of different class for different use
is listed below.

Max
Concrete

Aggregate
LAA Allowable
ass of

Place of Water Min.

Cement Fine Coarse Value slump
Use cemen ratio
(min.) downgraded max. (mm)
t ratio
MPa Mixture
PCC-10 10

CEM-II/A-
Machine

Lean/ L/M/V/W
20 mm brick
Blinding 42.5N FM 1.2 38 0.45 1:3:6
chips
Type-II
No Admixture
BDS EN 197-
25SCCM 25 MPa
Mixture Machine

1:2003 CEM-
base, wall,
II
top slab, 20 mm
42.5N/ASTM
box FM 2.5 crushed stone 30 0.40 75-100 1:1.5:3
C150
culvert, chips
Type-1
cross drain
Admixture
Type A or F

Page | 28
 BDS EN 197-

25SCBP 25 MPa
base, wall, 1:2003 CEM-

Batching Plant
top slab, II
20 mm
box 42.5N/ASTM
FM 2.5 crushed stone 30 0.40 75-100 1:1.5:3
culvert, C150
chips
cross drain Type-1
Admixture
Type A or F
BDS EN 197-
30SCCM 30 MPa
Mixture Machine

1:2003 CEM-
top slab, I
box 20 mm As per As per
52.5N/ASTM
culvert, FM 2.5 crushed stone 30 Mix 100-150 Mix
C150
cross drain chips Design Design
Type-1
Admixture
Type A or F
BDS EN 197-
30SCBP 30 MPa

1:2003 CEM-
Batching Plant

top slab, I
box 20 mm As per As per
52.5N/ASTM
culvert, FM 2.5 crushed stone 30 Mix 100-150 Mix
C150
cross drain chips Design Design
Type-1
Admixture
Type F/G

2.8.4 Regulation of Water Content

The amount of water used in the concrete for volume batching shall be regulated to adjust for
any variation of the moisture content or grading of the aggregates as they enter the mixer as
follows:
The batched volume of damp fine aggregate shall be corrected to the equivalent volume of dry
aggregate. The volume of moisture in the aggregates shall be deducted from the free water to
be added to the mix. To expedite correction to fine aggregate a “bulking curve” showing the
relation between moisture content and increase over dry volume shall be prepared in advance
by tests on the fine aggregate used. The Engineer in Charge may direct the use of a slump less
than that specified whenever concrete of such lesser slump can be consolidated into place by
means of vibration specified herein. Addition of water to overcome stiffening of the concrete
before placing will not be permitted. Concrete shall have uniform consistency from batch to
batch. Aggregate shall not be used for concrete when free water is dripping from the aggregate.
Concrete mix proportions shall be such that the concrete is of adequate workability and can
properly be compacted. Suggested ranges of values of workability of concrete for some placing
conditions are given in the Table given below.

Nominal
Degree of maximum Compacting
Slump mm
Workability Placing conditions aggregate factor
(mm)
Small sections (i.e. pre-cast or > 20 0 – 10
0.78
300mm thick) subjected to
Very low
intensive vibration and large 38 0 – 25
0.78
sections to norm al vibration
Low Simple reinforced sections with 20 0.85 10 – 25

Page | 29
 vibration and large sections without 38 25 – 50
0.85
vibration
Simple reinforced sections without 20 0.92 25 – 50
Medium vibration and heavily reinforced 38 0.92 50 – 100
sections with vibration
Heavily reinforced sections without 20 0.95 50 – 125
High 38 100-175
vibration 0.95

2.8.5 Durability of Concrete

For concrete intended to have low permeability when exposed to water, the water cement ratio
shall not exceed 0.45.
For corrosion protection of reinforced concrete exposed to brackish water, sea water or spray
from these sources, the water cement ratio shall not exceed 0.40.
If minimum requirement of concrete cover as given under the Section on ‘Reinforcing Steel’ is
increased by 12mm, water cement ratio may be increased to 0.45
The requirement of water cement ratio as stated above on Normal Weight Aggregate Concrete
exposed to Sulphate containing solutions shall be calculated using the weight of cement
meeting the requirements of ASTM C 150 or C 595, plus the weight of fly ash or pozzolana
satisfying ASTM C 618 and/ or slag satisfying ASTM C 989, if any.
2.8.6 Sulphate exposures
Concrete to be exposed to sulphate containing solutions or soils shall conform to the
requirements of the Table given below or be made with a cement that provides sulphate
resistance with the maximum water cement ratio provided in the Table.
Calcium chloride shall not be used as an admixture in concrete exposed to severe or very severe
sulphate containing solutions, as defined in the Table given below.

Requirements for Normal Weight Aggregate Concrete Exposed to Sulphate Containing Solutions
Water Soluble
Sulphate Maximum Water
Sulphate Sulphate (SO4)
(SO4) in Soil, Cement Type1 Cement Ratio, by
Exposure in Water (ppm)
percent by Weight
Weight
Negligible 0.00-0.10 0-150 Type-1 0.45
Moderate 0.10-0.20 150-1500 Type-II 0.45
Severe 0.20-2.00 1500-10,000 Type-V 0.45
Very severe Over 2.00 Over 10,000 Type-V +Pozzolana 0.45

Note: For types of cement see ASTM C150 and C595.

2.8.7 Corrosion of Reinforcement
For corrosion protection, maximum water-soluble chloride ion concentrations in hardened
concrete at ages from 28 to 42 days contributed from the ingredients including water,
aggregates, cementitious material s, and admixtures, shall not exceed the limits specified in the

Page | 30
 Table given below. When testing is performed to determine water soluble chloride ion content,
test procedure shall conform to AASHTO T 260, “Methods of Sampling and Testing for Total
Chloride Ion in Concrete and Concrete Raw Materials”.
Maximum Chloride Ion Content for Corrosion Protection

Maximum Water-Soluble
Type of Member Chloride Ion (C1) in Concrete,
Percent by Weight of Cement

Reinforced concrete exposed to chloride in service 0.15

Reinforce d concrete that will be dry or protected from
1.00
moisture in service
Other reinforced concrete construction 0.30

When reinforced concrete will be exposed to brackish water, sea water, or spray from these
sources, the above requirements for water cement ratio shall be satisfied.
2.8.8 Design of Concrete Mix
When designing the concrete mix, the following conditions shall be considered:
Strength: The class of the concerned concrete is to be as shown on the Drawings. The class is
the specified cylinder strength of 28 days and shall be determined as indicated above in the
Table under ‘Concrete Classes’ Sub-Section-2.8.3.1.
Water/ Cement Ratio: The ratio of free water to cement when using saturated surface dry
aggregate shall be as low as possible and not to exceed 0.45 by weight for all concrete.
For concrete in concrete barriers, edge beams and bridge deck, drainage structure directly
exposed to traffic or abutments in contact with the ground, the water cement ratio shall not
exceed 0.40.
Cement Type and Minimum Content: Cement Type-I or Type-II and minimum cement content
shall be used for classes of “Concrete” as mentioned in Sub-Section 2.8.3.1 above. Actual
quantity of cement shall be based on approved mix design and shall not less than the quantity
specified in sub-section concrete class above.
Minimum Filler Content: Filler is defined as fine aggregates including cement with a grain
diameter less than 0.25mm. It shall not be less than (except mass concrete) 435 Kg per cubic
meter Concrete for maximum 20mm size Coarse Aggregate.
Coarse Aggregate: The maximum size of the coarse aggregate shall be as indicated under
‘concrete classes’ sub-section on 2.8.3.1. The grading and quality shall fulfill the requirements
as mentioned in sub-section 2.8.2.4.
Fine Aggregate: The grading and quality are to be indicated in the portion on ‘Fine Aggregate’
under the Sub-section in 2.8.2.3 of this Specification.
Workability: The concrete shall be of suitable workability to obtain full compaction. Slum is a
measure of workability and slump of concrete is measured by the slump cone; a right circular
cone that is 12 inches high, the base of the cone is 8 inches in diameter and the top of the cone
is 4 inches in diameter. The slump of concrete shall be in accordance with the values shown in
classes of concrete above in Sub Section 2.8.3.1 unless otherwise required or approved by the
Engineer in Charge.
The designed concrete mix shall be approved by the Engineer in Charge to meet the
requirements for each structural component as shown under the section on ‘Concrete Classes’
of sub-section above. Prior to the commencement of concrete operations, the Contractor shall

Page | 31
design a mix for the concrete and prepare and test concrete samples of this mix under laboratory
conditions. Preliminary mixes shall be repeated and adjusted as necessary to produce a concrete
mix meeting the requirements stated under Sub-section 2.8.3.1 and the drawing. The details of
the mix and test results shall be submitted to the Engineer in Charge for his approval.
Following the Engineer in Charge’s approval of the mix design, the Contractor shall prepare a
trial mix in the presence of the Engineer in Charge or his representative. The trial mix shall be
batched, mixed and handled using the same methods and plant the Contractor proposes to use.
The mix shall comprise not less than half a cubic meter of concrete. The proportions of cement,
aggregates and water shall be carefully determined by weight in accordance with the
Contractor’s approved mix design and sieve analysis shall be made of the fine and coarse
aggregates.
Twelve concrete cylinder samples shall be made from the trial mix in the presence of the
Engineer in Charge. The concrete cylinders shall be made, cured, stored and tested in
accordance with BS 1881. Six cylinders shall be tested at 7 days and six cylinders shall be
tested at 28 days. If the strength of any of the cylinders tested at 28 days is recorded below the
characteristic strength, the Contractor shall redesign the mix, make further preliminary mixes
for the Engineer in Charge’s approval, then undertake additional trial mixes and test the
resultant samples until a satisfactory mix is obtained and approved by the Engineer in Charge.
From the same mix as that from which the test specimens are made, the workability of the
concrete shall be determined by the slump test using slump cone. The remainder of the mix
shall be cast in a wooden mound and compacted. After 24 hours the sides of the mound shall
be struck, and the surface examined in order to satisfy the Engineer in Charge that an acceptable
surface can be obtained with the mix.
When a proposed mix has been approved, no variation shall be made in the mix proportions, or
in the type, size, grading zone or source of any of the constituents without the consent of the
Engineer in Charge, who may require further trial mixes to be made before any such variation
is approved.
Until the results of trial mixes for a particular class have been approved by the Engineer in
Charge, no concrete of the relevant class shall be placed in the works.
During production, the Engineer in Charge may require additional trial mixes before a
substantial change is made in the materials or in the proportions of the materials to be used.
However, it need not be required to be carried out when adjustments are made to the mixed
proportions during production in order to minimize the variability of strength and to approach
more closely the target mean strength.
Trial mixes form ass concrete is not requested provided the Contractor is able to submit test
results from mixes carried out before, which prove that the demanded quality of the mass
concrete is according to the specifications.
When the Contractor intends to purchase factory-made pre-cast concrete units, trial mixes may
be dispensed with provided that evidence is given to satisfy the Engineer in Charge that the
factory regularly produces concrete, which complies with the Specification. The evidence shall
include details of mix proportions, water-cement ratios, slump tests and strengths obtained at
28 days.
Selection of the trial mix is the ultimate responsibility of the Contractor irrespective of the fact
that the Engineer in Charge has accorded approval.
Proportions of materials for concrete shall be such that:
a) Workability and consistency are achieved for proper placement in to forms and around
reinforcement, without segregation or excessive bleeding.
b) Resistance to special exposures to meet the durability requirements are provided, and

Page | 32
 c) Conformance with strength test requirements is ensured.
The approved mix shall be proportioned by weight or, except cement by volume, if volume
batching is approved by the Engineer in Charge. Allowance shall be made for the moisture
content of the aggregates.
Fine and coarse aggregate and water may only be measured by volume in boxes or containers
approved by the Engineer in Charge. Cement shall be added to Concrete Mixer by whole
number of bags only.
2.8.9 Batching
The Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable measuring equipment and devices of good
order required to determine and control accurately the relative number of various materials
entering the mix.
All measurements shall be by weight / volume and shall be accurate within a tolerance of 1%
for each batch. Besides, the deviation from the average amount of filler (materials including
cement less than 0.25mm) from ten samples of different batches of fresh concrete should not
be more than 6%.
Satisfactory methods of handling materials shall be employed. A batching plant shall be used
for measuring materials, but alternative methods proposed by the Contractor may be considered
subject to the approval of the Engineer in Charge. The batching plant shall include bins,
weighing hoppers and scales for the fine aggregate and for each separated size of coarse
aggregate. If cement is used in bulk, a bin, hopper and scales for the cement shall be included.
The container shall be watertight.
Provisions satisfactory to the Engineer in Charge shall be made for batching other components
of the mix at the batching plant or at the mixer, as may be necessary. The batching plant may
be either of stationary or of mobile type. It shall always be properly leveled within the accuracy
required for the proper operation of the weighing mechanisms.
Bins and Hoppers
Bins with adequate separate compartments for fine aggregate and for each required size of
coarse aggregate shall be provided in the batching plant. Each compartment shall discharge
efficiently and freely into the weighing hopper. Means of control shall be provided so that as
the quantity desired in the weighing hopper is being approached the material may be added
slowly and shut off with precision. A port or other opening for removing an overload of the
several materials from the hopper shall be provided. Weighing hoppers shall be constructed to
discharge fully.
Scales
The scales for weighing aggregates and cement shall be of either the beam type or the dial type
without spring. They shall be accurate within one-half of 1% under operating conditions
throughout the range of use. Ten 25 kg weights shall be available for checking the accuracy.
All exposed fulcrums, clevises and similar working parts of scales shall be kept clean. When
beam- type scales are used, provision shall be made for indicating to the operator that the
required load in the weighing hopper is being approached. The device shall indicate at least the
last 100 kg of load and up to 25 kg over-load. All weighing and indicating devices shall be in
full view of the operator while charging the hopper and he shall have convenient access to all
controls.
Cement may be measured by weight, or in standard bags weighing 50 kg net each. When
measured by weight, a separate satisfactory scale and hopper shall be provided together with a
boot or other approved device to transfer the cement from the weighing hopper.
The amount of water shall be measured by weight separately on an individual scale or may be

Page | 33
 measured by volume. Any solid admixture, to be added, shall be measured by weight; but liquid
or pest admixtures may be me assured by volume or weight.
2.8.10 Control of Concrete
General
The Contractor shall assume full responsibility that the quality of the concrete conforms to the
specifications and this responsibility shall not be waived by the tests carried out and approved
by the Engineer in Charge. The Contractor shall thus at his own discretion establish additional
testing procedures as necessary. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing samples of
concrete and its constituent materials either for testing by himself or for testing at the City
Corporation/LGED’s laboratory or BUET/RUET/KUET/CUET laboratory as designated by the
Engineer in Charge. For this purpose, concrete test cylinders which shall be made in accordance
with BS 1881/ AASHTO T 23 (ASTM C 31) shall be deemed to be ‘samples. All sampling of
constituent materials shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of the appropriate
British / American Standard and all sampling of fresh and of hardened concrete shall be carried
out in accordance with the provisions of BS 1881/ AASHTO T- 23 (ASTM C 31) unless such
provision is at variance with the Specification.
The tests, which the Contractor is required to undertake on behalf of the Engineer in Charge
are those to be carried out on fresh concrete at the place of final deposit, or elsewhere at the site
as directed by the Engineer in Charge.
Adjustment of Water/Cement Ratio
The Contractor shall test aggregates for moisture content and so determine the water- cement
ratio of the fresh concrete. Determination of water-cement ratio shall be carried out as required
by the Engineer in Charge and the results and calculations shall be submitted to him.
Slump tests
Slump testing of concrete shall be carried out as required by the Engineer in Charge. The
minimum is one test at the commencement of each casting, one per hour of casting and one
each time a strength test specimen is taken. A slump cone shall be made available at site by the
Engineer in Charge and testing shall be as per standard material testing procedure.
The slump of concrete to be used in the works shall not exceed the slump of the trial mix by
more than 10% and shall in any case not be more than the maximum specified in classes of
concrete in subsection
Compressive Strength
The Contractor shall, in the presence of the Engineer in Charge or his representative, sample
concrete for testing from the batching and mixing plant at the time of pouring of concrete into
the forms or elsewhere. Samples shall be obtained at uniform intervals throughout the
production or delivery of concrete for a given placement. Cylinder testing of concrete strength
shall be carried out as per test frequencies mentioned in sub-section 1.10.8.3 of these
specifications and as required by the Engineer in Charge. A minimum of three test cylinders
shall be taken for each day’s casting or for every 50 cubic meters of concrete cast in larger
pours.
After stripping, each cylinder shall be indelibly marked with the date of taking cylinder,
location in the structure and prescribed number. 2 sets of three test molds (cylinder) shall be
made available at site by the Engineer in Charge. Samples for testing shall be taken in the
presence of the Engineer in Charge or his representative and shall be dated. Test cylinders shall
be tested for 7 days and 28 days compressive strength. The average strength of the cylinders,
tested at 28 days, shall exceed the specified strength. One out of the three cylinders tested may
have a value less than the specified strength provided that it is not less than 85% of the specified
strength, except that not more than one test result per element may be below the specified

Page | 34
 strength.
Failure to Pass Tests
If cylinders taken at site during the progress of the works fail to reach the specified strength, no
further pouring of concrete shall take place until the cause of the failure has been established
and corrective measures have been taken to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge.
The Engineer in Charge may require that core samples are taken and tested in accordance with
ASTM C 42 or a similar standard or other tests to be performed on sections of the works made
from the suspect concrete. If such tests fail to demonstrate the integrity of the sections of the
works, all sections made with the suspected concrete shall be removed from the site. Costs of
all such tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
Testing Hardened Concrete
Entire operation shall be carried out as per the approval of the Engineer in Charge with due
precaution so that the structural integrity is no way affected. The Contractor shall remain
responsible for any negligence. If approved by the Engineer in Charge, on each specific
occasion, hardened concrete liable to rejection shall be tested for compressive strength in
accordance with ASTM C 42 at the Contractor’s expenses. Unless otherwise directed, cores
shall be 150mm in diameter. At least three specimens shall be cored and tested from the
locations as directed by the Engineer in Charge.
If the average compressive strength of the core specimens, so obtained, is equal to or greater
than 85% of the specified 28-days cylinder, compressive strength for that section of the work,
the concrete represented by the core specimen, shall be structurally satisfactory.
If the concrete is considered to be structurally satisfactory, the holes left by the removal of the
test cores shall be appropriately repaired or as directed by the Engineer in Charge. Unless
otherwise directed, concrete, which fails to meet the requirements of this Section shall be
removed and replaced in an approved manner without any extra cost to the Employer.
2.8.11 Concrete Construction
General
The Contractor shall, in due time and as soon as possible, submit his proposed construction
methods and work program along with Shop Drawings to the Engineer in Charge and shall
obtain his approval before commencement of any works. The Contractor shall maintain an
adequate number of trained and experienced supervisors and foremen at the site to supervise
and control the works.
All construction, other than concrete, shall conform to the requirements prescribed in other
Sections and Sub-sections for the several items of work entering into the complete structure.
Mixing Concrete
All concrete shall be mixed in batch mixers. It may be mixed at the site of construction, at a
central plant, or in transit. Each mixer shall have attached to it, in a prominent place, a
manufacturer’s plate showing the capacity of the drum in terms of mixed concrete and the speed
of rotation of the mixing drum.
Mixers at Local Site of Construction
Mixers at local sites shall be approved drum-type capable of combining the aggregate, cement,
and water into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass within the specified mixing period and of
discharging the mixture without segregation. The mixer shall be equipped with a suitable
charging hopper, water storage and a water-measuring device, accurate within 1%. Controls
shall be so arranged that the water can be applied only while the mixer is being charged.
Suitable equipment for discharging the concrete shall be provided. The mixer shall be cleaned

Page | 35
at suitable intervals. The pickup and throw-over blades in the drum shall be replaced when they
have lost 10% of their depth.
The mixer shall be operated at a drum speed of neither less than 15 nor more than 20 revolutions
per minute at the recommended speed of the manufacturer. The batched materials shall be so
charged into the drum that a portion of the water shall enter in advance of the cement and
aggregates and the water shall continue to flow into the drum for a minimum time of 5 seconds
after all the cement and aggregates are in the drum. Mixing time shall be measured from the
time all materials, except water, are in the drum and shall, in the case of mixers, having a
capacity of 1 cubic meter or less, not be less than 50 seconds and not more than 70 seconds.
Mixing shall be continued for at least 90 seconds after all materials are in the drum, unless a
shorter time is shown to be satisfactory by the mixing uniformity tests of ‘Specification for
Ready Mixed Concrete’ (ASTM C 94). In the case of dual drum mixers, the mixing time shall
not include transfer time. The contents of an individual mixer drum shall be removed before a
succeeding batch is emptied therein. Any concrete mixed less than the specified minimum time
shall be discarded and disposed of by the Contractor at his own expense.
The volume of concrete, mixed per batch, shall not exceed the mixer’s nominal capacity in
cubic meters as shown on the manufacturer’s guaranteed capacity standard rating plate on the
mixer. However, an overload up to 20% of the mixers nominal capacity may be permitted
provided concrete test data for strength, segregation and uniform consistency are satisfactory,
and provided no spillage of concrete takes place. Re-tempering concrete by adding water or by
other means shall not be permitted. Concrete, which is not of the required consistency at the
time of placement, shall not be used.
Central Plant Mixers
These mixers shall be of approved drum type capable of combining the aggregate, cement and
water into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass within the specified mixing period and of
discharging the mixture without segregation. Central plant mixers shall be equipped with an
acceptable timing device that will not permit the batch to be discharged until the specified
mixing time has elapsed. The water system for a central mixer shall be either a calibrated
measuring tank or a meter and shall not necessarily be an integral part of the mixer.
The mixer shall be cleaned at suitable intervals. It shall be examined daily for changes in interior
condition. The pick-up and throw-over blades in the drum shall be replaced when they have
lost 10% of their depth.
Central plant mixers, which have a capacity of 2-5 cubic meters and greater than 5 cubic meters,
may permit a minimum mixing time of 90 seconds and 120 seconds respectively provided a
mixing analysis and tests of the job materials indicate such produced concrete is equivalent to
strength and uniformity to that attained as stated in the preceding paragraphs.
Conveying Concrete
Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer/ batching plant to the place of final deposit as
rapidly as possible by methods that will prevent segregation or loss of materials. Conveying
equipment shall be capable of providing a supply of concrete to the place of deposit without
segregation of ingredients and without interruptions sufficient to permit loss of plasticity
between successive increments. Re-mixing of concrete shall not be allowed. Concrete, which
does not reach its final position in the forms within the stipulated time, shall not be used.
Mixed concrete shall be transported from the central mixing plant to the work site in agitator
trucks or up on written permission by the Engineer in Charge in non-agitator trucks. Delivery
of concrete shall be so regulated that placing is at a continuous rate unless delayed by the
placing operations. The delivery intervals between the batches shall not be so great as to allow
the concrete in place to harden partially, and in no case such an interval shall exceed 30 minutes.
Agitator Trucks

Page | 36
Unless otherwise permitted in writing by the Engineer in Charge, agitator trucks shall have
watertight revolving drums suitably mounted and shall be capable of transporting and
discharging the concrete without segregation. The agitating speed of the drum shall not be less
than 2 or more than 6 revolutions per minute. The volume of the mixed concrete permitted in
the drum shall not exceed the manufacturer’s rating nor exceed 80% the gross volume of the
drum.
Upon approval by the Engineer in Charge, open-top revolving-blade truck mixers may be used
in lieu of agitating trucks for transportation of central plant mixed concrete. The interval
between introduction of water into the mixer drum and final discharge of the concrete from the
agitator shall not exceed 45 minutes. During this interval the mix shall be agitated continuously.
Non-Agitator-Trucks
Bodies of non-agitating equipment shall be smooth, watertight metal containers equipped with
gates that will permit control of the discharge of the concrete. Covers shall be provided when
needed for protection against the weather. The non-agitating equipment shall permit delivery
of the concrete to the work site in a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass with a satisfactory
degree of discharge.
Uniformity shall be satisfactory, if samples from the one-quarter and three-quarter points of the
load do not differ by more than 30mm in slump. Discharge of concrete shall be completed
within 30 minutes after the introduction of the mixing water to the cement and aggregate.
Truck or Transit Mixers
These shall be equipped with electrically actuated counters by which the number of revolutions
of the drum or blades may readily be verified, and the counters shall be actuated at the
commencement of mixing operations at designated mixing speeds. The mixer when loaded
shall not be filled to more than 60% of the drum gross volume. The mixer shall be capable of
combining the ingredients of the concrete into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass and of
discharging the concrete with a satisfactory degree of uniformity.
When intended for use exclusively as agitators, truck mixers shall be provided with a water-
measuring device to measure accurately the quantity of water for each batch. The delivered
amount of water shall be within plus or minus 1% of the indicated amount.
Truck mixers may be used for complete mixing at the batch plant and as truck agitators for
delivery of concrete to job site or they may be used for complete mixing of the concrete at the
job site. They shall either be a closed watertight revolving drum or an open top revolving blade
or paddle type.
The amount of mixing shall be designated in number of revolutions of the mixer drum. When
a truck mixer is used for complete mixing, each batch of concrete shall be mixed for not less
than 70 and not more than 100 revolutions of the drum or blades at the rate of rotation
designated by the manufacturer of the equipment as the “mixing speed”. Such designation shall
appear on a metal plate attached to the mixer. If the batch is at least 0.5 cubic metres less than
the guaranteed capacity, the number of revolutions at mixing speed may be reduced to not less
than 50. Mixing in excess of 100 revolutions shall be at agitating speed. All materials, including
the mixing water, shall be in the mixer drum before actuating the revolution counter, which will
indicate the number of revolutions of the drum or blades.
When wash water (flush water) is used as a portion of the mixing water for the succeeding
batch, it shall be accurately measured and taken into account in determining the amount of
additional mixing water required. When wash water is carried on the truck mixer, it shall be
carried in a compartment separate from the one used for carrying or measuring the mixing
water. The Engineer in Charge will specify the amount of wash or flush water and may specify
a “dry” drum, if wash water is used without measurement or without supervision.

Page | 37
 When a truck is used for complete mixing at the batch plant, mixing operations shall begin
within 30 minutes after the cement has been added to the aggregate. After mixing, the truck
mixer shall be used as an agitator, when transporting concrete, at the speed designated as
agitating speed by the manufacturer of the equipment. Concrete discharge shall be completed
within 45 minutes after the addition of cement to the aggregates. Each batch of concrete,
delivered at the job site, shall be accompanied by a time slip issued at the batching plant, bearing
the time of departure therefrom. When the truck mixer is used for the complete mixing of the
concrete at the job site, the mixing operation shall begin within 30 minutes after cement has
been added to the aggregates.
The rate of discharge of the plastic concrete from the mixer drum shall be controlled by the
speed of rotation of the drum in the discharge direction with the discharge gate fully opened.
2.8.12 Handling and Placing of Concrete
Concrete placing shall not be commenced without the written approval of the Engineer in
Charge or his representative. This approval shall be in the form of a standard checklist approved
by the Engineer in Charge prior to the commencement of the Work. The checklist shall be filled
in and approved by the Engineer in Charge or his representative during his inspection and
acceptance of materials, plant and equipment, concrete pouring arrangements, the positioning,
fixing and condition of reinforcement and any other items to be embedded including the
cleanliness, alignment and suitability of the containing surfaces or formwork.
The temperature of concrete at the time of placing shall not exceed 35oC.
In preparation for the placing of concrete all sawdust, chips and other construction debris and
extraneous matter shall be removed from the interior of forms. Struts, stays and braces, serving
temporarily to hold the forms in correct shape and alignment pending the placing of concrete
at their locations, shall be removed when the concrete placing has reached an elevation
rendering their service unnecessary. These temporary members shall entirely be removed from
the forms and not be buried in the concrete.
The concrete shall be placed in the position and sequences indicated on the drawings and
specifications or as directed by the Engineer in Charge. The concrete shall be placed in clean,
oiled formwork and compacted before initial set has occurred. In any event concrete shall not
be placed later than 30 minutes from the time of mixing.
Concrete shall be placed in horizontal layers and each layer shall not be more than 600mm thick
except as hereinafter provided. When less than a complete layer is placed in one operation, it
shall be terminated in a vertical bulkhead. Each layer shall be placed and compacted before the
preceding batch has taken initial set to prevent injury to the green concrete and avoid surfaces
of separation between the batches. Each layer shall be compacted so as to avoid the formation
of a construction joint with a preceding layer that has not taken the initial set.
The concrete shall be deposited as far as possible in its final position without re-handling or
segregation and in such a manner so as to avoid displacement of the reinforcement and other
embedded items or formwork. Open troughs and chutes shall be of metal or metal line. The use
of long troughs, chutes and pipes for conveying concrete from the mixer to the forms shall be
permitted only on written authorization of the Engineer in Charge. Where chutes are used to
convey the concrete, their slopes shall not be such as to cause segregation. Where long steep
slopes are required, the chutes shall be equipped with baffles or be in short lengths that reverse
the direction of movement. In case an inferior quality of concrete is produced by the use of such
conveyors, the Engineer in Charge may order discontinuation of their use and the installation
of a satisfactory method of placing.
Pneumatic placing of concrete shall be permitted only if authorized by the Engineer in Charge.
The equipment shall be so arranged that a vibration does not damage freshly placed concrete.
Where concrete is conveyed and placed by pneumatic means the equipment shall be suitable in

Page | 38
kind and adequate in capacity for the work. The machine shall be located as close as practicable
to the place of deposit. The position of the discharge end of the line shall not be more than 3m
from the point of deposit. The discharge lines shall be horizontal or inclined upwards from the
machine. At the conclusion of placement, all the equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned.
Placement of concrete by pumping shall be permitted only if authorized by the Engineer in
Charge. The equipment should be so arranged that vibrations do not damage freshly placed
concrete. Where concrete is conveyed and placed by mechanically applied pressure, the
equipment shall be suitable in kind and adequate in capacity for the work. The operation of the
pump shall be such that a continuous stream of concrete without air pockets is produced. When
pumping is completed, the concrete remaining in the pipeline, if it is to be used, shall be ejected
in such a manner that there is no contamination of the concrete or separation of the ingredients.
After this operation, the entire equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned.
For simple spans, concrete shall preferably be deposited by beginning at the centre of the span
and working from the centre towards the ends. Concrete in girders shall be deposited uniformly
for the full length of the girder and brought up evenly in horizontal layers. For continuous spans,
the concrete placing sequence shall be as shown on the plans or agreed by the Engineer in
Charge.
Concrete in slab and girder haunches less than 1m in height shall be placed at the same time as
that in the girder stem. Concrete in slab spans shall be placed in one continuous operation for
each span unless otherwise provided. Concrete in T-beam or deck girder spans may be placed
in one continuous operation if permitted by the Engineer in Charge. Concrete in columns and
pier shafts shall be placed in one continuous operation unless otherwise directed.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer in Charge, no concrete shall be placed in the
superstructure until the column forms have been stripped sufficiently to determine the character
of the concrete in the columns. The load of the superstructure shall not be applied to the
supporting structures until they have been in place at least 14 days unless otherwise permitted
by the Engineer in Charge.
When the placing of concrete is temporarily discontinued, the concrete, after becoming firm
enough to retain its form, shall be cleaned of Latinate and other objectionable material to a
sufficient depth to expose sound concrete. To avoid visible joints as far as possible up on
exposed faces, the top surface of the concrete adjacent to the forms shall be smoothen with a
trowel. Where a “feather edge” might be produced at a construction joint, an inset form shall
be used to produce a blocked-out portion in the preceding layer which shall produce an edge
thickness of not less than 150mm in the succeeding layer. Work shall not be discontinued within
450mm of the top of any face unless provision has been made for a coping less than 450mm
thick, in which case, if permitted by the Engineer in Charge, a construction joint may be made
at the underside of the coping.
Immediately following the discontinuance of placing concrete all accumulations of mortar
splashed up on the reinforcement steel and the surfaces of forms shall be removed. Dried mortar
chips and dust shall not be puddled into the unset concrete. If the accumulations are not removed
prior to the concrete being set, care shall be exercised not to injure or break the concrete-steel
bond at and near the surface of the concrete while cleaning the reinforcement steels.
Where concrete is required to be placed against undisturbed ground, the entire space between
the finished concrete surface and the ground, including any over-break, is to be completely
filled with concrete of the specified class. The concrete shall be well rammed and compacted
to ensure that all cavities are filled, and the concrete is everywhere in contact with the ground.
Where permitted by the Engineer in Charge, any extensive patches of over break may first be
filled with concrete belonging to the Class for “Mass Concrete in Structure and CC Blocks” as
directed by the Engineer in Charge.

Page | 39
 Where concrete is required to be placed against a metal surface to which it is required to adhere,
care shall be taken to work the concrete well into the re-entrant angles and to ensure contact by
hammering the metal part on its free side provided that this is done without damaging the metal
or its protective coating, if any.
Concrete shall not be dropped through a height greater than 1200mm except with the approval
of the Engineer in Charge who may order the use of bankers and the turning over of the
deposited concrete by hand before being placed.
When placing operations would involve dropping the concrete more than 1200mm, it shall be
deposited through sheet metal or other approved pipes. As far as practicable, the pipes shall be
kept full of concrete during placing and their lower ends shall be kept buried in the newly placed
concrete. After the initial set of the concrete, the forms shall not be jarred and no strain shall be
placed on the ends of reinforcement bars, which are projected.
All chutes, troughs and pipes shall be kept clean and free from coatings of hardened concrete
by thoroughly flushing with water after each run. Water used for flushing shall be discharged
clean.
The laying of concrete shall be carried out in such a way that the exposed faces of concrete
shall be plain, smooth, sound and solid, free from honeycomb and excrescencies. After
compaction the exposed concrete surface shall be struck off smoothly with handheld steel
floats. No plastering of imperfect concrete faces will be allowed. Any concrete that is defective
in any way shall, if so, be ordered by the Engineer in Charge, be cut out and replaced to such
depth or be made good in such manner as the Engineer in Charge may direct.
Construction joints shall be formed in the work where indicated on the Drawings or as
previously approved by the Engineer in Charge. Where necessary, the Contractor shall allow
for working beyond ordinary working hours to allow each section of concrete to be completed
in a continuous pour with the placing of concrete carried up to each construction joint.
2.8.13 Compaction of Concrete
Concrete, during and immediately after depositing, shall be thoroughly compacted. The
compaction shall be done by mechanical vibration subject to the following provisions:
• The vibration shall be internal unless special authorization of other methods is given
by the Engineer in Charge or as provided herein.
• Mechanical vibrators of the capacity as approved by the Engineer in Charge shall be
used in conjunction with or without hand rammers, pokers or any other means as directed by
the Engineer in Charge.
• Vibrators shall be of a type and design approved by the Engineer in Charge. They shall
be capable of transmitting vibration to the concrete at frequencies of not less than 4,500
impulses per minute.
• The intensity of vibration shall be such as to visibly affect a mass of concrete of 20mm
slump over a radius of at least 450mm.
• Vibrators must be operated by skilled workmen engaged / appointed by the Contractor
mainly for this job.
• Surface vibrators of the type of Pan-vibrators, or vibrating screens shall be used for
compacting castings of shallow depth as directed by the Engineer in Charge.
• The Contractor shall provide a sufficient number of vibrators to properly compact each
batch immediately after it is placed in the forms. Spare vibrators shall be readily on hand in
case of breakdown.
• Vibrators shall be manipulated to thoroughly work the concrete around the

Page | 40
 reinforcement and embedded, and into the corners and angles of the forms.
• Vibration shall be applied at the point of deposit and in the area of freshly deposited
concrete. The vibrators shall be inserted and withdrawn from the concrete slowly. The vibration
shall be of sufficient duration and intensity to thoroughly compact the concrete but shall not be
continued so as to cause segregation. Vibration shall not be continued at any one point to the
extent that localized area as of grout are formed.
• While using immersion vibrators in walls, these should be lowered to the bottom of the
wall before concreting is started and pulled up as concreting proceeds. When using vibrators,
concrete can be placed from bottom to top of wall in one process, provided it is laid in regular
layers. Care should be taken to ensure that vibrators are not trapped under a great depth of
concrete.
• Application of vibrators shall be at points uniformly spaced and not further apart than
twice the radius over which the vibration is visibly effective
• Vibration shall not be applied directly or through the reinforcement to sections or layers
of concrete which have hardened to the degree that the concrete ceases to be plastic under
vibration. It shall not be used to make concrete flow in the forms over distances so great as to
cause segregation, and vibrators shall not be used to transport concrete in the forms.
• Vibration shall be supplemented by such spading as is necessary to ensure smooth
surface and dense concrete along form surfaces and in corners and locations impossible to reach
with the vibrators.
• In columns, deep beams and walls mild striking by mallets at the outer faces of the
form works should also be done simultaneously during use of vibrator for compactions.
The provisions of this Sub-section shall also apply to pre-cast piling, concrete cribbing and
other pre-cast members except that the manufacturer’s methods of vibration may be used if
approved by the Engineer in Charge.
2.8.14 Depositing Concrete under Water
Concrete shall not be deposited in water except with the approval of the Engineer in Charge
and under his immediate supervision and in this case the method of placing shall be as defined
in this portion.
Concrete deposited in water shall be with 10 percent excess cement. It shall be carefully placed
in a compact mass in its final position by means of Tremie, a bottom opening bucket or other
approved method and shall not be disturbed after being deposited. Special care must be
exercised to maintain still water at the point of deposit. Concrete shall not be placed in running
water. The method of depositing concrete shall be so regulated as to produce approximately
horizontal surfaces. The forms under water shall be watertight.
The discharge end of the tremie shall be closed at the start of work so as to prevent water
entering the tube and shall be entirely sealed at all times. The tremie tube shall be kept full to
the bottom of the hopper. When a batch is dumped into the hopper, the flow of concrete shall
be induced by slightly raising the discharge end, always keeping it in the deposited concrete.
The flow shall be continuous until the work is completed. The concrete slump shall be in
between 100mm and 150mm.
Depositing concrete by the opening bucket method shall conform to the following specification.
The top of the bucket shall be open. The bottom doors shall open freely downward and outward
when tripped. The bucket shall be completely filled and slowly lowered to avoid backwash. It
shall not be dumped until it rests on the surface upon which the concrete is to be deposited and
when discharged, shall be withdrawn slowly until well above the concrete.
2.8.15 Protection of Concrete from Adverse Conditions

Page | 41
 General
Concrete shall be protected from dam age from the effects of sunshine, dry wind, rain, running
water or mechanic al damage or a continuous period, until the concrete has reached at least
three quarters of its 28-days strength, but for not less than 10-days. The temperature of the
concrete mixture shall require to be maintained between 10oC and 32oC unless otherwise
provided herein. The Contractor shall submit his proposals to achieve this protection for the
Engineer in Charge’s approval. Damaged concrete shall either be repaired to an acceptable
condition or be removed and replaced.
Protection from Rain
During rainy weather, proper protection shall be given to ingredients, production methods,
handling and placing of concrete. If required, in the opinion of the Engineer in Charge, the
concrete depositing operation shall be postponed, and newly placed concrete shall be
protected from rain after forming proper construction joint for future continuation.

Protection from Hot Weather

During hot weather, proper attention shall be given to ingredients, production methods,
handling, placing, protection, and curing to prevent excessive concrete temperatures or water
evaporation that could impair required strength or serviceability of the member or structure.
Under a temperature above 32oC surfaces of forms, reinforcing steel, steel beam flanges etc. in
contact with the mix shall be cooled down below this temperature by means of water spray or
by any other appropriate method.
2.8.16 Curing of Concrete
In order to prevent loss of water, all newly placed concrete shall be cured by use of one or more
of the methods specified herein. Curing shall commence immediately after the free water has
left the surface and finishing operations are complete. In the case the concrete surface begins
to dry before the selected cure method is applied, the surface of the concrete shall be kept moist
by a fog spray application so as to prevent any damage to the surfaces.
Curing by other than steam or radiant heat methods shall continue uninterrupted for 7 days
except when pozzolanas in excess of 10 percent, by weight, of the Portland cement are use d in
the mix. When such pozzolanas are used, the curing period shall be 10 days. For other than top
slabs of structures serving as finished pavements, the above curing periods may be reduced,
and curing terminated when test cylinders cured under the same conditions as the structure
indicate that concrete strengths of at least 70 percent of that specified have been reached.
During periods of hot weather, if considered necessary by the Engineer in Charge, water shall
be applied to the concrete surfaces being cured by the liquid membrane method or by the forms-
in-place method. The process shall continue for a period that the Engineer in Charge determines
a cooling effect is no longer required.
Water
Water used in curing of concrete shall be subject to approval and shall be reasonably clean and
free of oil, salt, acid, alkali, sugar, vegetable, or other injurious substances. Water shall be tested
in accordance with and shall meet the suggested requirements of AASHTO T 26. Water known
to be of potable quality may be used without test. Where the source of water is relatively
shallow, the intake shall be so enclosed as to exclude silt, mud, grass, or other foreign materials.
Liquid Membranes
Liquid membrane forming compounds for curing concrete shall conform to the requirements
of AASHTO M 148 (ASTM C 309).
Waterproof Sheet Materials

Page | 42
 Waterproof paper, polyethylene film, and white burlap polyethylene sheet shall conform to
the requirements of AASHTO M 171 (ASTM C 171).
2.8.17 Methods Curing of Concrete
Forms-In-Place Method
Formed surfaces of concrete may be cured by retaining the forms in place without loosening
for the required time.
Water Method
Concrete surface shall be kept continuously wet by ponding, spraying or covering with
materials that are kept continuously and thoroughly wet. Such materials may consist of cotton
mats, multiple layers of burlap or other approved materials, which do not discolor or otherwise
damage the concrete.
Liquid Membrane Curing Compound Method
The liquid membrane method shall not be used on surfaces where a rubbed finish is required or
on surfaces of construction joints unless it is removed by sand blasting prior to placement of
concrete against the joint. Type 2, white pigmented, liquid membranes may be used only on the
surfaces of bridge decks, on surfaces that will not be exposed to view in the completed work or
on surfaces where their use has been approved by the Engineer in Charge.
When membrane curing is used, the exposed concrete shall be thoroughly sealed immediately
after the free water has left the surface. Form surfaces shall be sealed immediately after the
forms are removed and necessary finishing has been done. The solution shall be applied by
power- operated atomizing spray equipment in one or two separate applications. Hand-
operated sprayers may be used for coating small areas. Membrane solutions containing
pigments shall be thoroughly mixed prior to use and agitated during application. If the solution
is applied in two increments, the second application shall follow the first application within 30
minutes. Satisfactory equipment shall be provided, together with means to properly control and
assure the direct application of the curing solution on the concrete surface so as to result in a
uniform coverage at the rate of 4.5 liters for each 14 square meters of area.
If the film is damaged by inclement weather condition or by any other manner during the curing
period and before the film has dried sufficiently, a new coat of the solution shall be applied to
the affected portions equal in curing value to that specified above.
Waterproof Cover Method
This method shall consist of covering the surface with a waterproof sheet material so as to
prevent moisture loss from the concrete. This method may be used only when the covering can
be se cured adequately to prevent moisture loss.
The concrete shall be wet at the time the cover is installed. The sheets shall be of the widest
practicable width and adjacent sheets shall overlap a minimum of 150mm and shall be tightly
sealed with pressure sensitive tape, mastic, glue, or other approved methods to form a complete
waterproof cover of the entire concrete surface. The paper hall be secured so that wind will not
displace it. Should any portion of the sheets be broken or damaged before expiration of the
curing period, the broken or damaged portions shall be immediately repaired. Sections that have
lost their waterproofing qualities shall not be used.
Accelerated Curing
Curing by high-pressure steam, steam at atmospheric pressure, heat and moisture or other
accepted processes, shall be permitted to accelerate strength gaining and reduce time of curing.
Accelerated curing shall provide a compressive strength of the concrete at the load stage,
considered at least equal to the required design strength at that load stage. Curing process shall

Page | 43
 be such as to produce concrete with a durability at least equivalent to that obtained for concrete
cured by the above methods. The use of accelerated curing method for concrete containing
other types of cement or any admixture shall be subject to the Engineer in Charge’s acceptance.
Field Cured Specimens
The Engineer in Charge may require strength tests of cylinders cured under field conditions to
check adequacy of curing and protection of concrete in the structure.
Field cured cylinders shall be cured under field conditions in accordance with “Practice for
Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field” (ASTM
C 31). Field cured test cylinders shall be molded at the same time and from the same samples
as laboratory cured test cylinders.
Procedures for protecting and curing concrete shall be improved when the strength of field
cured cylinders at the test age designated for determination of f’c is less than 85% of that of
companion laboratory cured cylinders. The 85% limitation shall not apply, if field cured
strength exceeds f’c by more than 3.5 N/ mm2.
2.8.18 Surface Finishing
Surface irregularities shall be classified as “abrupt” or “gradual”. Offsets caused by displaced
or misplaced form sheathing or lining of form sections, or loose knots in forms or otherwise
defective formwork, will be considered as “abrupt” irregularities. All other irregularities will
be considered as gradual irregularities.
Where a surface is partly below and partly above the final ground level, the finish for the
exposed surface shall extend 0.15m below the ground level. The formed surfaces, which will
be permanently buried under earth, will require no treatment for abrupt or gradual irregularities.
However, repair of defective concrete and filling of holes left by the removal of fasteners from
the ends of tie rods shall be undertaken.
All abrupt and gradual irregularities on all exposed surfaces shall be removed by sack rubbing
or sand blasting or grinding or by all these methods or any other method approved by the
Engineer in Charge, which is not harmful to the concrete. The permissible surface irregularities
shall not exceed 6mm for abrupt irregularities and 13mm for gradual irregularities. The
permissible irregularities may be reduced at places of the surface where, in the opinion of the
Engineer in Charge, the formed finish does not provide the desired effect and no extra payment
shall be permissible for such work.
Holes, honeycombs, or other defects left by forms shall be promptly repaired in accordance
with the relevant Sub-section of this Specification.
All surfaces such as blinding concrete, opening for second stage concrete etc. on which concrete
is to be placed subsequently, shall not be finished for abrupt or gradual irregularities.
Generally, concrete surface shall remain as cast and no plastering work will be performed on
it. The formwork shall be lined with a material approved by the Engineer in Charge to provide
a smooth finish of uniform texture and appearance. This material shall leave no stain on the
concrete and shall be so joined and fixed to its backing that it imparts no blemishes. It shall be
of the same type and obtained from only one source throughout anyone-structure. The
Contractor shall repair any imperfections in the resulting finish as required by the Engineer in
Charge. Internal ties and embedded metal parts will be allowed only with the Engineer in
Charge’s specific approval.
Concrete Surface Finishing
Skilled workmen shall perform finishing of concrete surfaces to the satisfaction of the Engineer
in Charge. Exposed flat concrete surfaces shall be screeded to produce an even and uniform
surface and then they shall be given a trowel finish unless otherwise specified on the Drawings.
All exposed and unprotected edges shall be given 20mm x 20mm chamfers.

Page | 44
 The Concrete surface finishes on upward facing, horizontal or sloping faces shall be, except
for blinding concrete or otherwise stated on the Drawings, a “fair” surface. A ‘fair’ surface shall
be obtained by screed and troweling with a wood float.
Screed shall be carried out following compaction of the concrete by the slicing and tamping
action of a screed board running on the top edges of the formwork or screeding guides to give
a dense concrete skin true to line and level.
Wood float troweling shall be carried out after the concrete has stiffened and the film moisture
has disappeared. Working should be kept to the minimum compatible with a good finish and
the surface shall be true to the required profile to fine tolerance. Whenever necessary, the
Contractor shall provide, and erect overhead covers to prevent the finished surfaces from being
marred by rain drops or dripping water.
The surface of blinding concrete shall be obtained by screeding as described above.
Where a “fine” surface is indicated on the Drawings, this shall be obtained in a similar manner
to “fair” surface save that a steel float shall be used in lieu of the wood float.
The formed surface for painting exposed to view shall be smooth and free from projections and
shall be rubbed smooth immediately after the forms are removed. Formed surfaces shall be
classified as follows:
Unexposed concrete surfaces upon or against which backfill, or concrete is to be placed, require
no treatment except the removal and repair of defective concrete.
Exposed surfaces shall have a very smooth, sound surface by control of formwork, concrete
placement, and repair of abrupt surface irregularities by grinding or rubbing of high spots and
filling of voids.
Ordinary Finish
An ordinary finish is defined as the finish left on a surface after the removal of the forms when
all holes left by form ties have been filled and all irregular projections and any other minor
surface defects have been repaired. The surface shall be true and even, free from depressions
fins or projections.
The concrete shall be struck off with a straight edge and floated to true grade. Under no
circumstance shall the use of mortar topping for concrete surfaces be permitted.
Grout Cleaning
Grout cleaning may be called for on the Drawings or required by the Engineer in Charge
because of unsatisfactory appearance. The operation requires that the surface is wetted and
uniformly covered with a grout consisting of 1 parts cement to 1.5 parts fine sand. White cement
shall be used for all or part of the cement in the grout to give the required colour to match the
concrete. The grout shall be uniformly applied with brushes, or a spray gun and all air bubbles
and holes shall be completely filled. Immediately after the application of the grout, the surface
shall be vigorously scoured with a cork or other suitable float. While the grout is still plastic,
the surface shall be finished with a sponge rubber or other suitable float removing all excess
grout. This finishing shall be done at the time when grout will not be pulled from the holes or
depressions. After being allowed to be thoroughly dry, the surface shall be vigorously rubbed
with a dry burlap to completely remove any dried grout. There shall be no visible film of grout
remaining on the surface after this rubbing and the entire cleaning operation of any are a must
be completed on the day it is started. If any dark spot or steak remains after this operation, they
shall be removed with a fine-grained silicon car Tendered stone, but the rubbing shall not be as
much to change the texture of the surface. Unless it is required by the Drawings or directed by
the Engineer in Charge, grout cleaning should be delayed until the final cleanup of the project.
Rubbed Finish

Page | 45
On removal of forms the rubbing of concrete shall be started as soon as its condition permits.
Immediately before starting this work, the concrete shall be kept thoroughly saturated with
water for a minimum period of three hours. Sufficient time shall elapse before wetting down to
allow the mortar used in patching to have thoroughly set. A medium coarse carborundum stone
shall be used for rubbing a small amount of mortar on the face. The mortar used shall be
composed of cement and fine aggregate mixed in the same proportions as that used in the
concrete being finished. Rubbing shall be continued until all form marks, projections and
irregularities have been removed, all voids filled, and a uniform surface has been obtained. The
paste produced by this rubbing shall be left in place at this time. The final finish shall be
obtained by rubbing with a fine carborundum stone and water until the entire surface is of a
smooth texture and uniform colour.
After the final rubbing has been completed and the surface has dried up, burlap shall be use d
to remove loose powder. The final surface shall be free from unsound patches, paste, powder
and objectionable marks.
Any surface that has been given a rubbed finish shall be protected from subsequent construction
operations. Any surfaces not protected shall be cleaned and again rubbed, if necessary, to secure
a uniform and satisfactory surface. After completion of initial rubbing, curing shall be
continued.
Tooled Finish
Tooled finishing shall be carried out by treating the surface with an approved heavy-duty power
hammer fitted with a multi-point tool which shall be operated over the surface to remove 5mm
to 6mm of concrete and expose maximum area as of coarse aggregate.
Aggregate left embedded shall not be fractured or loose. 25mm wide bands at all corners and
arises shall be left as cast. The finish surface shall have even and of uniform appearance and
shall be washed with water up on completion.
No tooling shall be done until the concrete has set for at least 14 days and as much longer as
may be necessary to prevent the aggregate psub-sections from being ‘picked’ out of the surface.
Sandblasted Finish
Sandblasted finishing will be carried out on a thoroughly cured concrete surface with hard,
sharp sand to produce an even fine-grained surface in which the mortar has been cut away,
leaving the aggregate exposed.
Wire Brushed or Scrubbed Finish
Wire brushed or scrubbed finish will be performed as soon as the forms are removed and while
the concrete is yet comparatively green. The surface shall be thoroughly and evenly scrubbed
with stiff wire or fiber brushes, using a solution of muriatic acid. The proportion of the solution
shall constitute of one-part acid to four parts water. This shall be continued until the cement
film or surface is completely removed and the aggregate psub-sections are exposed, leaving an
even- pebbled texture presenting an appearance grading from that of fine granite to coarse
conglomerate, depending up on the size and grading of aggregate used. When the scrubbing
has progressed sufficiently to produce the texture desired, the entire surface shall be thoroughly
washed with water to which a small amount of ammonia has been added in order to remove all
traces of acid.
Inspection and Making Good
Concrete surface shall be inspected for defects and for conformity with the Specifications and
where appropriate, for comparison with approved sample finishes. Subject to the strength and
durability of the concrete being unimpaired, the making good of surface defects may be
permitted but the standard of acceptance shall be appropriate to the type and quality of finish
specified and ensure satisfactory performance and durability. On permanently exposed

Page | 46
 surfaces, great care is essential in selecting the materials and the mix proportions to ensure that
the final colour of the faced is a blend with the parent concrete in the finished structure.
Voids can be filled with fine mortar, preferably incorporating Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR)
or Polyvinyl Acetate (PVA), while the concrete is still green or when it has hardened. Fine
cracks can be filled by wiping a cement grout, an SBR, PVA or latex emulsion, a cement /SBR
or a cement /PVA slurry across them. Fins and other projections shall be rubbed down.
2.8.19 Measurement
The concrete shall be measured by number or/and by the number of cubic meters of the several
different grades and types completed in place and accepted. In computing quantities, the
dimensions use d shall be those shown on the Drawings or ordered by the Engineer in Charge;
but the measurement shall not include any concrete used for the construction of temporary
works or which is included in other billed items. No deduction from the measured quantity shall
be made for drainage, openings, pipes less than 300mm in diameter, conduits, chamfers,
reinforcement bars, pre-stressing tendons, expansion joints except in pre-cast work, water stops
or pile heads embedded in concrete.
The quantities of reinforcing and pre-stressing steel and other items as shown in the Contract
Documents which are included in the completed and accepted structure shall be measured for
payment as described in the Section on ‘Reinforcing Steel’ of this Specification.
Formwork and false work shall not be measured separately but shall be deemed to be an integral
part of the concrete items.
Surface finishes shall not be measured separately but shall be deemed to be an integral part of
the concrete items.
The number of pre-cast concrete members of each type listed in the Bill of Quantities will be
the number of acceptable members of each type furnished and installed in the work.
Joints including fillers and expansion joints shall not be measured separately unless they are
specified as separate items in the Bill of Quantities.
2.8.20 Payment
The cubic meters of concrete and the number of pre-cast concrete members, as measured above
for each type or class listed in the Bill of Quantities, will be paid for at the Contract prices per
cubic meter or the Contract unit prices per each member.
Payment for concrete of the various classes and for pre-cast concrete members of the various
types shall be considered to be the full compensation for the costs of furnishing all labour,
materials, equipment and incidentals and for doing all works involved in constructing the
concrete work completed in place, as shown on the Drawings and specified. Such payment also
includes full compensation for furnishing and placing expansion joint fillers, sealed joints,
water-stops, drains, vents, miscellaneous metal devices and the drilling of holes for dowels and
the grouting of dowels in drilled holes, unless payment for such work is specified to be included
in another Tender item.
Payment for all type of concrete work shall be considered to be the full compensation for the
cost of furnishing and installing and removal of all temporary works like staging, formwork,
working platforms, cranes, transporting, placing, compaction, finishing, curing and rendering
of the concrete as specified till the concrete work is self-supporting and can perform its intended
function.
The Contractor’s rates shall be fully inclusive of all costs of all laboratory tests to be carried
out as specified under different sub-items.
The payment shall be full compensation of all incidentals necessary to complete the Work.

Page | 47
 Payment for pre-cast units shall include all concrete, formwork, transport and erection and
where applicable any bolts or other devices and bedding necessary to fix them in their
permanent positions.
Pay Item shall be:

Item Name Unit of Measurement

Concrete Class as detailed on the Drawings Cubic Meter
and as specified in the Bill of Quantities.
2.8 BACKFILLING
2.9.1 Backfilling Material
Excavated Material: All excavated material shall be classified by the Engineer in Charge
either as suitable for fill or as waste. Approved suitable excavated material free of large lumps,
wood or other objectionable materials shall be placed as backfill except where other materials
are shown on the Drawings or required by the Engineer in Charge. Ordinary fill consists of
earth having Liquid Limit not exceeding 50 and Plasticity Index not exceeding 20 and shall be
used as backfill material and are as except where other materials are shown on the Drawings or
required by the Engineer in Charge.
Sand: The work under this item shall consist of filling plinth, ramp area, entry stair or any place
or area as directed by the Engineer in Charge, to make up level with sand having Fineness
Modulus (F.M) of 0.8 (point eight) and compacted to minimum 95% of MDD (Modified
Proctor). This may be achieved using saline free water and mechanical roller.
2.9.2 Back-filling
All excavated spaces shall be backfilled around the permanent structure to original ground
level. Prior to placing back-fill, all trash, metal, debris, lumber, bricks, soft materials and similar
objectionable foreign materials shall be removed from the area to be back-filled. No back-fill
shall be placed against any structure without the prior permission of the Engineer in Charge.
Any protective support, bracing or shoring shall be removed, as the backfilling progresses in
such a manner as to prevent caving-in. The back-fill shall be of approved materials that will
produce a dense and well-compacted filling. The material shall be free from large lumps,
organic or extraneous materials. Ordinary fill placed as back-fill shall be laid and compacted.
The moisture content of the fill materials, before compaction, shall be within + 5% of the
Optimum Moisture Content. Each layer of materials shall be compacted uniformly using
approved compaction equipment and procedures. The materials shall be compacted to achieve
not less than 98% Maximum Dry Density beneath the bottom level. The dry density, after
compaction within 300mm below the top level, shall not be less than 95% Maximum Dry
Density as determined in accordance with standard compaction with optimum moisture content
and soaked CBR (4 days) should be greater than 4% at 98% Maximum Dry Density. The
compact layer shall be approved by the Engineer in Charge before the Contractor can
commence a new layer.
Sand back-fill shall be placed and thoroughly compacted in layers of not more than 150mm.
Layers of filling shall be tested as directed by the Engineer in Charge. Each compacted layer
shall not be covered until tested and the Engineer in Charge is satisfied that the specified degree
of compaction has been achieved.
In placing back-fill, the material shall be placed, in as far as possible, to approximately the same
height on each side of the structure. If conditions require appreciable higher back-filling on one
side, the additional material shall not be placed until permission is given by the Engineer in
Charge on being satisfied by himself that the structure has enough strength to withstand any

Page | 48
 created pressure.
In general, no structure shall be subject to the pressure of back-filling until 3 (three) days on
expiry of the period designated for removal of forms. This period shall be extended if subnormal
curing conditions exist. Adequate provisions shall be made for drainage during back-filling.
2.9.3 Measurement
The volume of excavation and back-fill shall be measured in cubic meter of excavated
materials. The quantity of excavation for structures to be measured for payment shall include
excavation for all structures. The measured volume shall be bounded on the bottom by the plane
of the bottom of the footing and on the top by the surface of the existing ground and on the
sides by vertical planes of the footings.
Backfilling with previously excavated material shall not be measured or paid separately but
shall be deemed included within the rate for excavation.
Volumes to be excavated for blinding concrete shall not be measured and the price for the
excavation thereof shall be included in the above measured item for excavation and back-fill.
Back-fill with concrete or sand, where directed by the Engineer in Charge, including concrete
seals shall be measured separately as the volume within the plan outline and top and bottom
surfaces. Concrete or sand, placed to back-fill excavation beyond the excavation required, will
not be measured for payment.
In the case of structures for which a lump sum price is called for, the volume of excavation as
stated above for the work as shown on the Contract Drawings shall be subtracted from the
volume measured as above, and the price to be paid or deducted shall be based on the measured
increase or reduction of the excavation shown on the Drawings.
2.9.4 Payment
The work measured shall be paid for at the Contract unit prices per cubic meter as shown in the
Bill of Quantities. The payment shall be full compensation for all excavations and back-filling
for structures including supply of all materials, labour, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary for the successful completion of the work. The payment shall also be the full
compensation for excavation and subsequent backfilling of working space around the
foundation structure.
Pay Item shall be:
Unit of
Item Name
Measurement
Earthwork in excavation of foundation and backfilling to cum
original level with approved excavated material
Disposal of excavated material outside side premises cum
Sand filling on prepared foundation bed with specified FM cum

2.10 REINFORCEMENT
2.10.1 Description
This work shall consist of furnishing and placing bars of the grade, type and size shown in
accordance with these Specifications sub-section 2.8.2.6 and in conformity with the
requirements shown on the Drawings.
2.10.2 Materials
2.10.2.1Bar Reinforcement
Bar Reinforcement shall be in accordance with these Specifications sub-section 2.8.2.6.

Page | 49
2.10.2.2Wire Mesh
Wire mesh shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO Standard Specification M55 –
Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.
2.10.2.3Binding Wire
Reinforcement binding wire shall be best black annealed mild steel wire of 22 BWG.
2.10.2.4Bar Sizes
AASHTO Standard Specifications refer to the Imperial measurement system. However,
metric sizes of steel are shown on the Drawings and shall be in accordance with these
Specifications sub-section 2.8.2.6.
2.10.3 Ordering Material
The name of the proposed supplier (or names of proposed suppliers) of the reinforcement
shall be submitted as soon as possible to the Engineer in Charge for his approval. The
Contractor shall also submit all relevant data on the steel required by the Engineer in
Charge, such as breaking strength, yield strength, characteristics on elongation, chemical
composition etc.
Bar reinforcement shall be transported in standard bundles, tagged and marked in
accordance with the Code of Standard Practice of the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute.
No steel shall be delivered without a manufacturers certificate guaranteeing the yield
stress, which shall be submitted to the Engineer in Charge.
The steel shall be stored on Site and marked in a way that later enables identification of
the steel corresponding to each certificate.
2.10.4 Additional Tests
The Contractor shall cut out steel samples as directed by the Engineer in Charge, and these
shall be tested according to the Engineer in Charge’s instructions by an approved Testing
Institution. Expenses incurred in connection with cutting out, transporting and testing of the
samples shall be paid for by the Contractor. In general, two samples shall be tested from
each batch of a particular size of reinforcement delivered to the site.
2.10.5 Construction Methods
Protection and Storage
Reinforcement for structures shall be handled and stored in a manner that will prevent
bending out of the desired shape and any accumulation of dirt, oil and paint. When
placed in the works it shall be free from dirt, oil, grease, paint, mill scale and loose or
thick rust.

Cutting and Bending

Bars shall be cut and bent cold to the dimensions indicated and with equipment and
methods approved by the Engineer in Charge.
Stirrups and tie bars shall be bent around a pin having a diameter not less than four times the
minimum thickness of the bar. Bends for other bars, where full tension in the bar may occur,
shall be made around a pin having a diameter not less than twenty times the bar diameter.
Hooks shall conform to American Concrete Institute Standard Building Code
Requirements for reinforced concrete ACI 318-83, or as shown on the Drawings.
Placing, Supporting and Fastening
All bar reinforcement shall be placed, supported, and secured prior to any concreting
operations. The reinforcement shall be checked and approved by the Engineer in Charge
before pouring of concrete.

Page | 50
 Cover blocks required for ensuring that the reinforcement is correctly positioned shall be
as small as possible, consistent with their purpose, of a shape and material acceptable to the
Engineer in Charge and designated so that they will not overturn when the concrete is placed.
If made of concrete, the maximum size of aggregate shall be 6 mm and the mix proportion
shall be one part of Portland cement to 2 parts of sand by weight. Wire shall be cast in
the block for the purpose of tying it to the reinforcement. The wire must not be closer than
30 mm from the concrete surface. The use of small stones or wood blocks shall not be
permitted.
The reinforcement shall be held securely in place at the exact position and at the exact
spacing as indicated on the Drawings by the use of wire ties at bar intersections, supports
and cover blocks. Wire ties shall be securely tied and folded so that they do not project
beyond the planes formed by the reinforcing bars. The adequacy of the supports and ties to
secure the reinforcement properly shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer in Charge.
Splicing
Reinforcement shall be furnished in the lengths indicated on the Drawings. When the
Contractor wishes to use more splices than are indicated and/or necessary, the Contractor
shall furnish Working Drawings to the Engineer in Charge for approval in accordance
with the guidelines provided on the Contract Drawings. If such additional splices are
approved, the extra weight occasioned by such splices shall not be included in the
measurement of reinforcement for payment.
All splices for high yield deformed steel bars and mild steel plain steel bars shall have lap
lengths as shown on the Drawings. Lap splices shall generally be located at points of
minimum tension in bars. Except where otherwise shown on the Drawings lap splices
shall be made with the bars placed in contact and securely wired together.
Welding of reinforcing steel shall be done only if detailed on the Drawings or approved in
writing by the Engineer in Charge. Before the Engineer in Charge approves of such
welding, the Contractor shall submit and test any samples as the Engineer in Charge may
require and make do allowance for the time elapsing before results are available.
2.10.6 Substitutions
Substitutions of bars shall be permitted only with specific permission by the engineer and
at the expense of the Contractor. If bars are substituted, they shall have a cross sectional
area equivalent to the design area, or larger. If substitutions of bars are permitted,
the Contractor shall produce working drawings and reinforcing detailing at his own expense
and to the approval of the Engineer in Charge.
2.10.7 Measurement
The quantity of reinforcement to be measured under this Section shall be the computed
weight in kilogram of material used and accepted as shown on the Drawings provided that
the quantity shall not include the reinforcement in any item of work for which the basis of
payment includes the reinforcement. In computing the weight to be measured, the
theoretical weights of bars of the cross section shown on the Drawings or BOQ, shall
be used. The weight shall be calculated based on a constant mass per metre run.
The computed weight shall not include the extra material incurred when bars larger than
those specified are used, or the extra material necessary for splices when bars shorter than
those specified are used with the permission of the Engineer in Charge, or the weight of
any devices used to support or fasten the reinforcement in the correct position including
any necessary chairs.
No separate payment shall be allowed for chairs of any shape and profile, spacer bar of any
shape and profile, lap/spice and welding unless otherwise shown in the drawings, wastages,

Page | 51
 binding wire etc., as the cost of these is included in the unit rate.
2.10.8 Payment
This work measured as provided above, shall be paid for at the Contract unit price per
kilogram of reinforcement of the particular type. The payment shall be full compensation
for furnishing and placing reinforcement of any size and for all labour, binding wire,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Section.
Pay items shall be:

Item Name Unit of Measurement

Reinforcing Bars Per Kg

2.11 BRICK FLAT SOLING

2.11.1 Description
The work covered by this item shall consist of supplying and laying bricks on top of the earth
or sand bed to form a sub-base.
2.11.2 Construction Requirements
Bricks shall comply with the requirements of sub-section 2.7.2.1. The blinding sand will have
a minimum Fineness Modulus of 0.80 and shall be clean, and free of any organic matters and
shall comply with the requirements of the sub-section 2.7.2.3

Bricks shall be laid flat in surface-to-surface contact with adjoining bricks and their joints
shall be filled with sand. The sand shall be brushed in until the joints are filled. Flushing in
sand with water will not be done unless permitted. Bricks shall not be laid on the floor or
foundation bed until the floor or foundation bed is inspected and approved by the Engineer’s
representative.

In the case of Multi-layer Soling, care shall be taken to stagger or "break" all joints in placing
subsequent courses of soling. No brick shall be laid on loose earth or earth filling which is
not compacted to the desired degree.
2.11.3 Method of Measurement
Brick soling shall be measured by square meter (sqm) in plan.
2.11.4 Basis of Payment
The amount of completed and accepted work, measured as provided above, will be paid for
at the contract unit price per square meter (sqm) which price shall be in full compensation
for all material, transporting, placing, and all labour, equipment, tools, and incidentals
necessary to complete the work according to the applicable plans.
Pay items shall be:

Item Name Unit of Measurement

Brick Flat Soling Square meter

2.12 PLASTER ON BRICK MASONRY

2.12.1 Description
This item shall consist of providing 12mm thick (1:4) plaster on brick walls, and where
necessary in accordance with these Specifications and drawings.

Page | 52
2.12.2 Materials
Cement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO/ASTM conforming to BDS EN 197-1
CEM-II/B-M and comply with the requirements of sub-section 2.7.2.2 of these specifications.
Sand shall have F.M value 1.2 and comply with the requirements of sub-section 2.7.2.3 of these
specifications.
Water shall conform to the requirement of sub-section 2.7.2.4 of these specifications.
Cement and sand shall be mixed dry in the specified proportion until the mixture is uniform in
colour. Only enough water shall be added to provide plasticity. Mortar shall be mixed only in
quantities for immediate use. Mortar, which has taken initial set, shall not be used on the work
with or without addition of fresh material. Mixing mortar on a finished floor must not be
allowed.
2.12.3 Surface preparation
Before application of plaster, the joints in brick walls shall be adequately raked out where
necessary. The surfaces shall be scrubbed clean of loose materials and soaked with water and
kept damped for 24 hours.
2.12.4 Construction requirements
All concealed utility service lines, conduits, pipes, clamps, door/window frames and other
inserts must be in position before plastering commences. Chiseling and patch repairing of
plaster shall not be permitted.
Application Method: Cement and sand properly mixed with water in the proportion as specified
shall be laid on clean walls to a thickness of 12mm. Thicker plaster on an average up to 20mm
may be necessary for the uneven face of the 250mm wall.
Guide bands of plaster called the ‘Paya’ shall first be laid on the wall at suitable distance and
their verticality and their being in the same plane shall be checked by a wooden straight edge
(Patta) and plumb bob. Then the space in between shall be made even by laying the plastering
materials and finishing the surface evenly between guide bunds. The surface and level of plaster
should be checked by placing the straight edge horizontally, vertically and at different angles.
Laid plaster shall be finished by straight edge and trowel. Adequately long straight edge shall
be used to bring the surface to true plane and level. After finishing the plaster with trowels, a
steel trowel (USHA) shall be used to make the plaster smooth. Care should be taken to see that
usha is not used just after laying the plaster when it is too soft. Neither should it be used after
it has completely hardened up. It should be used just after the plaster has commenced to set, so
that there is no mark of usha in the plaster for obtaining a perfectly smooth surface having no
undulation.
A plaster consists of two coats, under and finish, when applied over brick masonry, the under
and finish coats shall be applied with an interval to permit the undercoat to set.
Plaster shall be kept moist by watering and protected from weather for at least 10 days
immediately following completion.
If any cracks appear in the plaster or any part sounds hollow when tapped or is found to be soft
or otherwise defective after the plaster has dried, it will be considered as defective, and the
defect shall be made good by cutting out and replastering at the Contractor's own cost.
2.12.5 Method of Measurement
The work shall be measured in square meter (sqm) of actually plastered surface.
2.12.6 Basis of Payment
Payment shall be made for the amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided
above at the contract unit price per square meter of plaster which price shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing all materials, mixing of mortar, plastering surface to be plastered,

Page | 53
 watering and protecting the plaster after completion, provision, erection and removal of
scaffoldings and as well as incidentals necessary to complete the work according to the
applicable plans.
Pay items shall be:

Item Name Unit of Measurement

Cement Sand (1:4) Plaster Square meter

2.13 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE

2.13.1 Description
This work shall consist of supply and installation of reinforced concrete pipe in accordance
with these Specifications and to the locations, lines, levels, grades and design shown on the
Drawings and or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. This shall also include colors of
appropriate diameter for joining the pipes, if required.
The work shall further include the connection of existing drains, which have been interrupted
by road construction, to the new drainage system, as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The reinforced cement concrete pipes shall be for heavy duty cross drains/ pipe drains/outlets
and any other structure carrying heavy traffic having mix 1:1.25:2.5 to attain a minimum 28-
day cylinder strength of 30 MPa.
2.13.2 Materials
Coarse Aggregate: The Coarse Aggregate shall be 20 mm downgraded stone chips having
LAA value not exceeding 30 and comply with the requirements of the sub-section 2.8.2.4 of
these specifications. Nominal size 20mm downgraded coarse aggregate for concrete shall
be as follows:
Sieve Size (mm) % passing by weight
25 100
19.5 90-100
9.5 20-55
4.75 0-10
2.36 0-5

Fine Aggregate: Fine Aggregate shall have F.M not less than 2.5 and shall fulfill the
requirements as mentioned in sub-section 2.7.2.3 and sub-section 2.8.2.3 of these
specifications.
Cement: Cement shall conform to the requirements of Bangladesh Standard (BDS) Specification
EN 197-1: 2003 CEM-I 52.5N/ ASTM C150 type-1 and comply with the requirements of the sub-
section 2.7.2.2 of these specifications.
Water:
The quality of water that shall be used in reinforced concrete pipe work shall comply with the
sub-section 2.7.2.4 of these specifications.
Reinforcement
Reinforcement in pipes shall consist of hoops and longitudinal bars.

Pipe Wall Circumferential Reinforcement Longitudinal Reinforcement

Page | 54
 (Internal thickness Inner Inner case Outer Outer Inner Inner case Outer Outer
Dia) mm mm cage dia turns case dia case turn cage dia turns case dia case turn

900 100 8mm 14 8mm 11 6mm 8 6mm 8

1000 115 8mm 17 8mm 13 8mm 8 8mm 8

1100 115 8mm 19 8mm 14 8mm 8 8mm 8

1200 120 8mm 21 8mm 16 8mm 8 8mm 8

1400 135 10mm 17 10mm 13 8mm 12 8mm 12

1600 140 10mm 21 10mm 16 8mm 12 8mm 12

1800 150 10mm 22 10mm 22 10mm 14 10mm 14

2000 170 10mm 22 10mm 22 6mm 14 10mm 14

Admixture:
Water reducing admixture shall be ASTM C494 type-A or F @ 1.75 liter per meter cube of
concrete to attain a minimum 28-day cylinder strength of 30 MPa. The admixture shall comply
with the requirements of sub-section 2.8.2.5 of these specifications.
2.13.3 Construction Methods
Excavation
Procedures for earth excavation as laid down under the Section on “Excavation and Backfill
for Structures” of these Specifications shall be followed.
The width of the pipe trench shall be sufficient to permit satisfactory jointing of the pipe and
thorough tamping of the bedding material under and around the pipe. Before laying the ground
shall be trimmed true to line and grade, as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge, over sufficient
width to permit satisfactory construction of the bedding. Special care shall be taken to remove
any hard or deleterious material from the foundation area. When soft, spongy or unstable soil
is encountered, such soil shall be removed from under the pipe for a width and to a depth as
directed by the Engineer -in Charge and replaced with sand or other suitable selected material
properly compacted to provide adequate support to the pipe. The prepared surface shall provide
a firm foundation of uniform density throughout the length of the culvert. Excavated materials
shall not be deposited in the drainage channel and shall be utilized according to suitability as a
common fill to the landscape area.
The Contractor and the Engineer-in-Charge shall agree on the location, line and level of each
pipe before excavation commences. The Excavation, Backfilling, and Disposal of Excavated
Material of the foundation shall comply the requirements of the sub-section 2.5.2 “Excavation”,
sub-section 2.5.3 “Disposal of Excavated Material”, and sub-section 2.5.4 “Pumping and
Bailing” of these specifications.
Sand Cushion:
To provide a smooth, level, and strong foundation, the foundation trench shall have to be
excavated to a further depth of 150mm below the pipe bottom. Before laying pipes, the exaction
trench shall have to be filled with 150mm compacted layer sand having FM 0.50. This method
shall be adopted in firm ground but in soft soil the trench shall have to be excavated to a depth
until a solid ground is available. The Engineer-in-Charge shall inspect the excavated trench and
allow the contractor to start sand filling. In any case the compacted layer of sand filling shall
not exceed more than 150mm. The sand layer shall be leveled, watered, and compacted to a
minimum dry density of 95% with optimum moisture content (Modified Proctor Test) by
ramming the sand layer. The area bottom of pipe must necessarily be flat and must be shaped
to fit the pipe and hollowed out to receive the socket and make joints so that the pipes rest

Page | 55
 throughout their entire length on the solid foundation and the bearing of a pipe is eventually
taken by the body of the pipes and not by the sockets.
Installation of Pipe
Each pipe should be carefully examined for soundness before laying it. It should be rung with
a light hammer and those that do not ring true and clearly be rejected. The outlet shall be
excavated before the pipe is laid. Pipe lying shall commence at the downstream end of the
pipeline with pipe collars upstream. The pipe shall be laid in a straight line with the pipe joints
made as follows:
Jute fiber packing shall be placed around the full circumference of the groove of the pipe
already laid. The lower half of the groove shall then be filled with sufficient mortar to bring the
inner surfaces of the abutting pipes flush.
The upper half of the tongue of the pipe to be laid shall be similarly filled with mortar.
After laying the inside and outside of the joint shall be grouted with mortar to a smooth finish.
The joint shall be kept moist and protected for at least two days before back filling commences.
Before succeeding sections of pipe are laid, the lower half of the groove of the preceding section
shall be plastered on the inside with cement mortar of sufficient thickness to bring the inner
surface of the abutting pipes flush and even. At the same time the upper half of the succeeding
pipes shall be similarly plastered with mortar.
Back Filling
The complete pipe run shall be inspected and accepted by the Engineer-in-Charge, including
the level and grade before back filling commences. The trench shall be backfilled with sand or
granular material, placed, watered and compacted in layers, to give a minimum cover of 400mm
above the top of the pipe. The backfill shall be brought up evenly on either side of the pipe.
The sand back fill shall be inspected and accepted by the Engineer-in-Charge before the trench
is back filled to ground level with ordinary fill. This ordinary fill shall not contain stones and
other objectionable material and shall be compacted in layers with approved equipment and
procedures to the same density as the adjacent sub-grade.
2.13.4 Measurement
The brickwork and back filling shall be measured as the volume in cubic meters. Back filling
shall be measured as the accepted compacted volume in cubic meters. Brick flat soling in
foundation shall be measured in square meters as per drawing. The volume shall be computed
as the volume bounded by the measured length of pipe run, the trench width shown on the
Drawings or ordered by the Engineer-in-Charge. The installation of the pipe shall be measured
as the length in linear meters of the pipe installed complete and accepted.

2.13.5 Payment
The work measured shall be paid at the Contract unit prices as shown in the Bill of Quantities.
The payment shall be full compensation for the supply of materials and execution of the work
including all necessary labour, equipment, tools and incidentals.
Item of Payment
Description of Item Unit
Supplying pre-cast RCC Pipes Linear meter
Sand Backfilling Cubic meter
2.14 SCAFFOLDING AND FORMWORK
Scaffolding (False work)

Page | 56
Details, plans and structural calculations for scaffolding shall be submitted by the
Contractor to the Engineer in Charge for approval, but in no case shall the Engineer in
Charge’s approval relieve the Contractor of his Contract responsibilities. All scaffolding
shall be designed and constructed by the Contractor to provide the necessary rigidity and
to support dead and live loads without deflection or deformation. The Engineer in Charge
may require the Contractor to employ screw jacks or hardwood wedges to take up any
settlement in scaffolding and formwork, either before or during the placing of concrete.
Tests may be required by the Engineer in Charge of materials proposed by the
Contractor for scaffolding. Test loadings of the completed scaffolding may also be
required for the determination of flexibility and strength. All expenses associated with
testing shall be borne by the Contractor.
Scaffolding which cannot be founded on a satisfactory footing shall be supported on piles,
which shall be spaced, driven and removed in a manner approved by the Engineer in Charge.
When the Contractor wishes to support scaffolding on existing structures, he shall submit
his proposals in due time to the Engineer in Charge, in writing, including loads from the
scaffolding. The Engineer in Charge will consider the proposals and respond in writing.
Scaffolding shall be set to give the finished structure a camber, if indicated on the
Drawings or specified by the Engineer in Charge.
Scaffolding shall remain in place for periods which shall be determined by the Engineer in
Charge.
Formwork
Formwork shall include all temporary or permanent molds for forming the concrete.
Formwork shall be of steel or metal and shall be built mortar tight and rigid enough to
maintain the concrete in position during placing, compacting, setting and hardening.
Formwork for exposed surfaces (“wrought form”) shall be made of metal sufficiently
rigid with no surface blemishes that will impair the quality of the concrete surface
finish. No rusty or bent metal forms shall be used. Exposed concrete arises shall be provide
with formed chamfers, as indicated on the Drawings, or instructed by the Engineer in
Charge.
All forms shall be set and maintained true to the line designated until the concrete is
sufficiently hardened. Forms shall remain in place for periods, which shall be determined
by the Engineer in Charge. When forms appear to be unsatisfactory in any way, either
before or during the placing of concrete, the Engineer in Charge may order the work stopped
until the defects are corrected.
If requested, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in Charge working drawings of
the forms and also, if requested, calculations to verify the rigidity and strength of the forms.
The shape, strength, rigidity, water tightness and surface smoothness of reused formwork
shall be maintained at all times. Formwork that is unsatisfactory in any respect shall not be
reused.
Metal ties or anchorages within the form shall be so constructed as to permit their
removal to a depth of at least 50 mm from the face without injury to the concrete. All
fittings for metal ties shall be of such design that, upon their removal, the cavities which
are left will be of the smallest possible size. The cavities shall be filled with cement mortar
and the surface left sound, smooth, even and uniform in colour.
Formwork shall be so constructed that easy cleaning out of any extraneous material
inside the formwork can be achieved without disturbing formwork already checked and
approved by the Engineer in Charge.

Page | 57
 Formwork shall be treated with approved non-staining oil or saturated with water, to
facilitate formwork removal. The Engineer in Charge may require trials to be carried
out before approval is given for the use of a particular type of oil, to ascertain that the oil
proposed by the Contractor does not discolour or injure the finished concrete face in any
way.
Before placing any concrete, all shavings, loose binding wires, soil, rubbish and all
foreign matter shall be removed from the formwork and the formwork shall be carefully
and thoroughly washed with water.
Edge beams and parapets shall be made to such accuracy that no deviations from the
correct alignment are visible. The cross-sectional areas of the superstructure of bridges shall
in no place deviate more than 3% from the theoretically correct cross-sectional areas.
Anchors for bearings, expansion joints, railings, etc. shall be placed within the tolerances
indicated on the Drawings or specified by the Engineer in Charge.
2.14.1 Approval of Scaffolding and Formwork
If plans and calculations of scaffolding and formwork are requested by the Engineer in
Charge, no construction of such scaffolding and formwork shall take place before
approval by the Engineer in Charge, in writing. Such approval shall not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibilities under the Contract for the adequacy of scaffolding and
formwork.
The Engineer in Charge shall have reasonable time for his examination of the Contractor’s
plans and calculations, especially if scaffolding is introducing temporary loading on new
structures. The Contractor shall not be allowed extensions of Contract time due to
awaiting such approval.
The Engineer in Charge shall inspect all formwork and scaffolding and no concrete shall
be placed until the Engineer in Charge’s approval has been given. Such approval shall not
relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibilities under the Contract for the successful
completion of the structure.

Page | 58
 CHAPTER 3
PAVEMENT WORKS
3.1 GENERAL
This specification has been prepared with all possible care and diligence and every effort
has been made to cover all types of materials and items of work necessary to complete the
road pavement. All workmanship and materials to be used in the Works shall be of the best
quality of their respective kinds as specified herein.
The Contractor is obliged to liaise with the City Corporation, the Project Coordination
Office, the DSM Consultants working the City Corporation, the Beneficiary, and other
Bangladesh Governmental Institutions. The Contractor must obtain an agreement to the
site access and other reasonable requirements of these agencies.
3.2 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
This shall comply with sub-section 2.3. of these specification
3.3 REMOVAL OF EXISTING /DAMAGED STRUCTURE
This shall comply with sub-section 2.4. of these specification
3.4 ROADWAY EXCAVATION
3.4.1 Description
The work shall consist of all the requirement excavation within the limits of the Site, the
removal, hauling and proper utilization or disposal of all excavated materials and shaping of
excavation and preparation of exposed surfaces of excavation on the entire length of the
roadway, in accordance with these Specifications and to the lines, levels, grades, dimensions
and cross section shown on the Drawings or as required by the Engineer in Charge
Roadway excavation shall include the following:
(a) All excavation indicated on the Drawings within the faces of the cross sections and
excavation of all materials for side roads and intersections.
(b) The removal and disposal of existing pavement, sidewalks, curbs or curbs and gutters
within the limits of construction.
(c) Excavations directed by the Engineer in Charge
3.4.2 Materials
Excavated materials shall be the property of the City Corporation and shall be classified as
suitable and unsuitable soil and salvaged materials. To be suitable as fill material as described
above, the soil must not contain roots, sod or other deleterious materials and must conform to
the requirements in sub-section 3.5.2 of these specifications. The Engineer in Charge will
decide if the soil is suitable or unsuitable.
Different type of salvaged materials shall be stockpiled separately on site as directed by the
Engineer in Charge and the Contractor shall remain responsible for these until such time as
they are disposed of by the Engineer in Charge.
3.4.3 Construction Methods
General
All roadway excavation and embankment construction shall be performed as specified here
and shall conform to the required alignment, levels, grades, and cross sections. In case of over
excavation, the contractor has to refill with suitable materials and compact to its original
degree at his own cost. The surface of the excavated areas shall be neat and workmanlike and
shall have the required form, super elevation, levels, grades and cross section.

Page | 59
 Excavated Material Used in the Works.
Suitable soil from the roadway excavation may be used as fill material for preparation of sub -
grade as shown on the typical cross sections and described in Section 3.5.2 of these
Specifications provided that prior approval is obtained from the Engineer in Charge.
All suitable excavated material shall be used so far as practicable in constructing the roadway.
Where necessary, the excavated material to be reused for the works shall be temporarily
stockpiled in a suitable and safe area, in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer in
Charge.
Waste
Unsuitable material and required roadway excavation in excess of that needed for construction
of any part of the Works shall be known as waste. Waste material shall be disposed of in
accordance with the instructions of the Engineer in Charge
Unsuitable Materials
If unsuitable material is encountered at or below subgrade level in cut areas or at or below
embankment foundation level in fill areas, it shall be excavated to limits as directed by the
Engineer in Charge and be backfilled.
Slopes
All slopes shall be finished in a neat and workmanlike manner and to accuracy appropriate to
the material, and care shall be taken that no material is loosened below the required slopes.
Drainage
During construction, the road and ditches shall be maintained in such condition as to ensure
proper drainage at all times. No excavation will be permitted in areas under water. Ditches and
channels shall be so constructed and maintained as to avoid damage to the roadway section.
3.4.4 Measurement
All required and accepted roadway excavation including excavation of unsuitable soil shall be
measured for payment in its original position and the volume determined in cubic meters by
the end area method as computed from the original and final geometric cross sections of the
required and completed work.
3.4.5 Payment
The quantities of roadway excavation measured as specified above will be paid for at the
Contract unit price per cubic meter. Such price shall include excavation, shaping and
completion of all surfaces and for furnishing all labour, materials, tools, equipment, and
incidentals to complete the work including handling of excavated materials stock piling and
disposing off surplus excavated materials to a place as directed by the Engineer in Charge
Waste roadway excavation shall be the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of at
his cost to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge. Excavation in suitable material which is
to be used for embankment fill material shall not be measured separately. Excavation in borrow
pit whether within the Site or not shall not be paid under this item but shall be deemed to be
included in the relevant fill item.
The above price and payment shall be full compensation for all work involved in performing
the roadway excavation completely as shown on the Drawings and as specified in these
Specifications and as directed by the Engineer in Charge, including the cost of temporary
stockpiling, selecting and protecting the materials to be reused.
Pay item shall be:

Page | 60
 Item name Unit
Roadway excavation in any classified material
(i) and disposal of spoil to fill in embankment, Cubic meter
stockpile or otherwise.
Roadway excavation (Picking up flat soling and
(ii) Square meter
HBB)
(iii) Roadway excavation in Edging linear meter
Roadway excavation in sub-base, base, WMM &
(iv) Cubic meter
RCC pavement
3.5 CONSTRUCTION OF EARTHEN EMBANKMENT
3.5.1 Description
This work shall consist of the construction of embankment and fill by furnishing, placing,
compacting and shaping suitable material of acceptable quality obtained from approved sources
in accordance with these specifications and to the lines, levels, grades, dimensions and cross
sections shown on the Drawings or as required by the Engineer in Charge. The location of
borrow pit shall be approved by the Engineer in Charge and must be at a distance of 2.5 to 7.5m
from toe of the embankment.
3.5.2 Materials
Embankment fill materials shall be free from roots, sods or other deleterious materials.
Materials for embankments shall be stockpiled outside the working areas. Materials shall be
tested and approved by the Project Manager. The selected fill so stockpiled shall satisfy the
following criteria:

- Liquid limit of fraction passing 425-micron sieve shall

50%
not exceed

- Plasticity index of fraction passing 425-micron sieve

20%
shall not exceed

3.5.3 Construction Methods

3.5.3.1 Preparation of Foundation for Embankment
Prior to placing any embankment upon any area, all clearing and grubbing operations shall have
been completed in accordance with Sub-Section 2.3 and excavation under carriageways shall
be carried out in accordance with Sub-Section 3.4.
The original ground surface should be prepared by scarifying, watering, aerating and
compacting. The dry density after compaction shall not be less than 95% of MDD at optimum
moisture content with reference to laboratory density test AASHTO Standard Hammer.
Embankments in swamps or water shall be constructed as indicated on the Drawings and as
described in these Specifications.
3.5.3.2 Placing of Embankment
General
Except as otherwise required by the Drawings, all embankments shall be constructed in layers
approximately parallel to the finished grade of the roadbed. During construction of
embankment, a smooth grade having an adequate crown shall be maintained at all times to
provide drainage. The placing of fill shall be carried out in successive layers for the full width
of fill as shown on the Drawings and in 500m lengths unless otherwise directed by the Engineer
in Charge. The layers shall not exceed 150mm in thickness on completion of compaction. When

Page | 61
 embankment fill is placed adjacent to structures it shall be performed in accordance with the
direction of the Engineer in Charge
Widening Existing Embankment
Where embankment fill is being carried out to widen an existing embankment the new fill
material shall be fully keyed into the old embankment by means of benching which shall be in
steps each not less than 300mm high and 600mm wide. Steps shall be cut in advance of the
filling. Material cut in benches may be used as fill if it complies with Sub-Section 3.5.2 of these
specifications and as directed by the Engineer in Charge
Embankment Fill from Roadway Excavation
Existing Sub-grade within 300mm depth of the existing road level, (or as specified) not having
the required percentage of compaction, shall be excavated out.
Provided the excavated material is in accordance with sub-section 3.5.2 then it shall be
reworked and reused in widening or raising the embankment with compacting to 98 percent
maximum dry density at optimum moisture content, with reference to laboratory density test
and in accordance with sub-section 3.5.3.3.
No payment will be made for excavation under this item, and it will be deemed to be included
in the rates in accordance with sub-section 3.6.5.
Where the item "embankment fills from roadway excavation" is used and paid for there shall
be no separate payment for sub-grade preparation under sub-section 2.7 of these specifications.
Cladding Layer
Where the embankment fill consists of sand it will require a cladding layer of soil having
Plasticity Index as mentioned in sub-section 3.5.2 of these specifications. This layer shall cover
the embankment slope and the earthen shoulder. After placing the cladding will be compacted
to the desired level, trimmed, and finished to the desired line, level and grade.
3.5.3.3 Compaction of Embankment
Embankment shall be constructed in not more than 150mm compacted layers. When necessary,
each layer, before being compacted, shall be mixed with dry material, or otherwise processed
to bring the optimum moisture content. The material shall be worked so as to have uniform
moisture content through the entire layer.
Each layer of material shall be compacted uniformly by use of adequate and appropriate
mechanical compaction equipment. The compaction shall be carried out in a longitudinal
direction along the embankment and shall generally begin at the outer edges and progress
toward the center except in the super elevated area in such a manner that each section receives
equal compact effort. Compaction equipment shall be operated over the full width of each layer
insofar as practicable.
Samples to determine the compaction shall be taken regularly with a minimum one sample for
each full width 100 linear meters of a finished layer or as directed by the Engineer in Charge
Such “density tests" will be carried out in accordance with ASTM D 1556/02 sand cone/sand
replacement method. The compacted layer shall be approved by the Engineer in Charge before
the Contractor can commence a new layer. If the test results show that the density is less than
the required density the Contractor shall carry out further compaction to obtain at least the
required density.
The dry density after compaction in embankment layers more than 300mm below subgrade
level shall not be less than 90% of the maximum dry density as determined in accordance with
AAHSTO Standard Method compaction. The dry density after compaction in embankment
within 300mm below the top of the subgrade level (or such greater depth if shown on the plans
and drawings) shall not be less than 98% maximum dry density as determined in accordance

Page | 62
 with AAHSTO Standard Method compaction. Soaked (4 day) CBR shall be greater than 4% at
98% maximum dry density by (STD). In case if the embankment material is sand, side slopes
and shoulders shall be covered by cohesive soil of PI value in between 8-20%
Overfilling
To ensure that, the embankment is properly compacted up to the edges of each layer,
overfilling and compaction of approx. 300mm horizontally on both sides of the embankment
is required, which later on has to be cut and removed. No extra payment will be made for this
procedure.

3.5.4 Measurement
Embankment shall be measured in cubic meters based on cross sections compacted and
accepted in place. The volume to be measured will be the net volume of required and accepted
embankment, actually constructed and completed in accordance with the Specification, to the
lines, levels, grades and cross sections required or as directed by the Engineer in Charge The
cross section to be used will be the area bound by the subgrade (below improved subgrade or
sub-base) the side slopes or edge limits and the original ground line.
No allowance will be made for material cut in benching operations. The final volume of
embankment fill shall not include the voids for bridges and box culverts. The voids for pipes,
manholes, catch basins and the like shall not be deducted.
3.5.5 Payment
This work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the Contract unit prices per cubic
meter. Payment shall be full compensation for performing the work, furnishing the materials
and providing all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work,
including all payments for obtaining, carrying and stockpiling of the embankment fill.
Pay item shall be:

Item Name Unit

Embankment fill from any approved source
Cubic meter
outside the site
Embankment fill from roadway excavation Cubic meter
Providing cladding layer in earthen
Cubic meter
shoulder and slope with suitable material
Sand backfills to Swamp Cubic meter

3.6 EARTHEN SHOULDER

3.6.1 Description
This work consists of the provision of specified wide strips of shoulders adjacent to the
pavement on either side. The shoulders shall be constructed in accordance with the lines, levels,
dimensions and cross sections shown on the Drawings and as directed by the Engineer in
Charge.
3.6.2 Materials
The material used shall meet the same requirements as those shown in Sections 3.5.2.
3.6.3 Construction Methods
Pre-work measurements should be taken just before commencing the work. The material shall
be spread in layers of uniform thickness to achieve 150mm of compacted thickness and
sprinkled with water. After approval by the Engineer in Charge, compaction shall be carried
out on each layer by approved mechanical plant. The material shall be compacted to a density

Page | 63
 of 95% of the maximum dry density as determined by STP T-4.5. Samples to determine the
compaction shall be taken regularly with a minimum of one sample for each 100 linear meters
per layer of each finished shoulder or as decided by the Engineer in Charge. Such density tests
will be carried out according to STP T-5.1. The compact layer shall be approved by the
Engineer in Charge before the Contractor can commence a new layer. If the test results show
that the density is less than the required density the Contractor shall carry out further
compaction to obtain at least the required density.
3.6.4 Measurement
This item of work shall be measured in cubic meters of the completed accepted works on the
basis of pre and post work. The volume to be measured will be the net volume of required and
accepted shoulder, actually constructed and completed in accordance with the Specification, to
the lines, levels, grades and cross sections required or as directed by the Engineer in Charge.
3.6.5 Payment
Payment will be made as per the requirements of sub-section 3.5.5
3.7 BRICK ON END ENDING
3.7.1 Description
This work consists of provided and placing brick on end edging along the road adjacent to the
side of the pavement of single layer brick flat soling and herringbone bond brick or of water
bound macadam and bitumen carpet.
3.7.2 Materials
The materials shall consist of First-Class bricks which should meet the requirements of sub-
section 2.7.2.1.
3.7.3 Construction Methods
Bricks shall be laid on end edging with their longest side vertical and 75mm/125mm side across
the road including necessary excavation filling and ramming to the satisfaction of the Engineer
in Charge. The completed work shall be true to line and level and grade as indicated on the
Drawings. Interstices between brick edging and adjacent paving or soling shall be filled by
brushing in sand until voids are filled; the edging shall be sprinkled then with water.
3.7.4 Measurement
This item shall be 'measured in linear meters of completed brick on end edging.
3.7.5 Payment
This work shall be measured as provided above and shall be paid for at the Contract unit price
per unit of measurement. The prices and payment shall be full compensation for preparation of
the edging including excavation, furnishing and placing of materials, backfilling, ranging
including provision of labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the works
as specified in this Section.
Pay item shall be:
Item Name Unit
Brick on end edging Linear meter
3.8 IMPROVED SUBGRADE
3.8.1 Description
This work shall consist of furnishing placing and compacting improved sub-grade material
on a prepared and accepted subgrade in accordance with these Specifications and to the
lines, levels, grades, dimensions and cross sections shown on the Drawings or as instructed by

Page | 64
 the project manager.
3.8.2 Materials for ISG
Material shall be of natural sand or soil or mixture of sand and soil, free from vegetable
matter, from soft particles and from excess clay. The materials should be locally available
sand (passing <=15% through #200 sieve).

The fraction passing the 425-micron sieve shall, have a Plasticity Index not
(a) Plasticity:
greater than 10 (STP Section 3).

The material shall have a soaked C BR value not less than 8% when compacted to
(b) CBR:
98% of maximum dry density as determined by Modified Proctor

Grading: The grading (washed method) shall conform to one of the grading envelopes
A to C in Table 3 .8-1 below. If the material meeting these grading is not locally
available, then grading-D may be used with the permission of the project manager.
Material with the grading-E shall not be allowed to be used under this item.
Table 3 .8-1
Grade A B C D E
Nominal
fineness
Not less
modulus 1.5 - 2.5 1.0 - 1.5 0.8 - 1.0 0.5 - 0.8
than 2.5
Sieve Size
(mm)
9.5 100 100 100 100 100
4.75 90 – 95 90 – 95 100 100 100

2.36 70 – 90 90 - 100 100 100 100

1.18 45 – 70 70 - 95 95 - 100 100 100

0.600 25 – 45 40 - 80 85 - 100 95 - 100 100

0.300 10 – 20 10 - 50 50 - 80 70 - 90 80 - 95

0.150 0–2 0 - 20 5 - 25 15 - 40 30 - 60

Gradings outside the above limits may in certain circumstances be approved by the
Engineer in Charge. Such permission shall be in writing.
3.8.3 Construction Methods
3.8.3.1 Spreading of ISG Material
All subgrade drainage shall be completed prior to spreading the improved subgrade material.
Improved subgrade shall be spread in layers, with a compacted thickness up to 150mm
subject to the approval of the project manager, and the layers shall be nearly equal in thickness
as possible.
Prior to spreading the improved subgrade, a partial width of shoulder, not less than 750mm
wide, shall be constructed to the elevation of the top of each compacted layer being placed
and the inside edge made as straight as practicable. After the partial completion of the
shoulders, the improved subgrade shall be spread upon the subgrade and against the
previously formed shoulders, in layers of uniform thickness, as herein specified, to give the
required compacted depth shown on the Drawings.

Page | 65
3.8.3.2 Sprinkling, Rolling and Compacting
Immediately after each layer has been spread and shaped to camber or super elevation
satisfactorily, it shall be thoroughly compacted with mechanical compaction equipment
approved by the project manager. Rolling operations shall begin from the outer edge of
roadbed toward the center, gradually in a longitudinal direction, except on super-elevated
curves, where rolling shall begin at the low side and progress towards the high side.
The moisture content at the time of compaction shall be the optimum moisture content
(Standard Compaction) ±3%.
If the density measurement checks fall below the specified density level, then compaction
shall be required, irrespective of the field compaction trial results.
In order to ensure uniform bearing capacity at the finished improved subgrade level CBR
measurements shall be made. The CBR shall be such that the Laboratory Value obtained at
the specified compaction and after 4 days soaking, shall exceed 8 percent. In areas where
these requirements are not met, correction shall be made by such measures as the project
manager deems necessary.
Improved subgrade material which does not contain sufficient moisture to be compacted in
accordance with the requirements of this section shall be reworked and watered as directed
by the project manager. The Contractor shall carry out this work at his own expense.
Improved subgrade material containing excess moisture shall be reworked and dried prior
to or during compaction. Drying of wet material shall be performed by methods approved
by the project manager, at the expense of the Contractor.
The finished improved subgrade at any point shall not vary more than 20mm above or
below the planned grade or adjusted grade. The thickness of the finished improved
subgrade shall be on average not less than the required thickness and not thinner than
20mm less than the required thickness at any point and the average of five thickness
measurements in any 100 meters of road shall be not thinner than 15mm less than the required
thickness. Improved subgrade which does not conform to the above requirements shall be
reworked, watered and thoroughly recompacted to conform.
3.8.4 Measurement
Improved subgrades described in this article shall be measured by the cubic meters of
material compacted in place and accepted. Measurement shall be based on the average width
and thickness of the improved subgrade shown on the Drawings or instructed by the project
manager and actual length measured horizontally along the centerline of the surface of the
road.
3.8.5 Payment
This work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the Contract unit rate per cubic
meter for improved subgrade as detailed below. The payment shall be full compensation
for furnishing all materials, hauling, placing, compacting, sprinkling, finishing and shaping,
and for all labour, equipment, tools and other incidentals necessary to complete the work
specified.
Pay item shall be:
Item Name Unit
Improved Sub‐grade Cubic meter
3.9 SUB-BASE (AGGREGATE-SAND SUB-BASE)
3.9.1 Description
This work shall consist of providing, laying and compacting sub-base on the finished approved

Page | 66
 sub-grade or improved sub-grade, to the lines, levels, dimensions and cross section shown on
the drawings or as directed by the Engineer in Charge.
3.9.2 Materials
The sub-base should consist of AS (Aggregate & Sand). The sub-base shall consist of a
homogeneous mixture of crushed brick aggregate local sand and natural or artificial mixture of
sand free from vegetation and excess clay. The materials should be locally available sand
(passing <=15% through #200 sieve).
The aggregate shall be crushed First Class or Picked Jhama Bricks. The crushed bricks shall
comply with the following requirements:
o water absorption shall not exceed 15%
o maximum size of aggregate shall be 38mm.,
o LAA-40 or as directed by the Engineer in Charge in the case of reuse of salvaged
materials.
The resultant mixture shall meet the following requirements:
a) Plasticity: The fraction passing the 425micron sieve shall have a liquid limit not greater
than 25 and a plasticity index not greater than 6. (STP Section 3)
b) CBR: The materials shall have a soaked CBR value not less than 32% when compacted to
98% of maximum dry density (Modified Proctor).5
Grading Requirements for Aggregate & Sand Sub-Base Material

I Sieve Size % Passing by Weight

50mm 100
37.5mm 100
19mm 55-95
9.5mm 35-75
4.75mm 25-60
2.36 mm 15-50
0.600 mm 1 0-35
0.300 mm 1 0-25
0.075 mm 5-15
3.9.3 Construction Method
Sub-base materials shall be at or near the optimum moisture content (OMC) at the time of
placing. The brick aggregate and sand shall be mixed thoroughly to obtain a homogeneous mix
complying with the grading requirements of this Section before placing it on the sub-grade. The
mixed materials shall be spread uniformly upon the prepared and approved sub-grade in such
quantities that the thickness of the layer after compaction shall not exceed 150mm. The material
shall be mixed or sprinkled with water to bring it to the correct moisture content. The total
thickness required shall be in accordance with the drawings. The relationship between the loose
thickness and compacted thickness shall be determined from field trials and used in controlling
the loose thickness at the time of spreading the mix.
After spreading has been completed and the surface shaped according to the cross-sectional
requirements, rolling shall commence. Rolling should be done by a power roller weighing 8 to
10 tons or equivalent vibratory roller. Rolling shall begin at the outer edge towards the center
of the road with the rear wheel overlapping the shoulder. When the broken aggregates become

Page | 67
 firm, the roller will be shifted to the opposite side of the road and the operation will be repeated.
After both edges rolled modestly firm, the roller will be gradually moved towards the center by
overlapping 150mm of the rolled width until the mix has attained the required density.
The rolled surface shall be checked for correctness of levels and cross-falls and any
irregularities therein shall be corrected by loosening the affected areas, adding or removing the
necessary quantities of aggregate and re-rolling until the entire surface conforms to the correct
levels and cross levels and cross-falls.
The dry density after compaction shall not be less than 98% of the maximum dry density
(Modified Proctor). The field density shall be checked at least once in every 100 linear meters
of sub-base surface. The prepared sub-base layer shall be protected against damage until
covered by the base course. Moisture content at the time of compaction shall be the optimum
moisture content: ±3%.
The finished surface shall be within a tolerance of ± 10mm or of the elevation shown in the
drawings and it shall nowhere vary more than 10mm from the straight edge 3m long applied to
the surface parallel to the center line of the pavement and no more than 12mm from a template
conforming to the cross-section.
The depth over each 100m shall be measured in at least 3 places by digging holes. The average
depth should be as per drawings, but the minimum depth shall not be less than 95% of the
specified depth.
3.9.4 Measurement
Sub-base shall be measured in cubic meters. It shall be based on the average width and
compacted thickness of sub-base as shown on the drawings and the actual length measured
horizontally along the center line of the surface of the road.
3.9.5 Payment
The work, measured as provided above, shall be paid for the contract unit price. The price and
payment shall be full compensation for performing the work including furnishing and placing
the materials, supplying all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the
work prescribed in the Section. Separate measurements should be taken at the bends if found
necessary.
Pay item shall be:
Item Name Unit
Sub-base Cubic Meter (Compacted thickness)
3.10 WMM BASE COURSE (BRICK CHIPS)
3.10.1 Description
Wet mix macadam shall be made from first class and picked Jhama bricks. The quality of first-
class bricks shall comply with material quality as mentioned in sub-section 2.7.2.1. The picked
Jhjama bricks are over burn first class bricks, uniformly vitrified throughout with good shape,
hard, slightly black in colour and without cracks. The vitrified mass shall not become porous
or spongy as a result of over burning. The compressive strength of bricks shall not be less than
24 MPa. All other requirements for first class bricks shall apply to Picked Jhama except
dimensions. Picked Jhama Bricks may have dimensions slightly below first-class bricks but not
less than 235mm x 110mm x 70mm. The unit weight of shall not be less than 1200 kg per m3 .
Brick chips of different sizes shall be combined to provide requisite grading and premixing the
material with water at optimum moisture content in mechanical mix plant at stack yard
including carriage of mixed material by tipper with proper cover to site.
Graded bricks aggregate wet mix base course to spread on the prepared and accepted sub-base

Page | 68
 to the lines, levels, dimensions, and cross sections shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Project Manager
3.10.2 Materials
The base course material shall consist of a homogeneous mixture of crushed brick aggregate
and brick dust blended to comply the gradation as below.
Table 3.10.2 Grading Requirements for WMM Base Course

Sieve Size % Passing by Weight

50mm 100
37.5mm 95-100
19mm 60-80
9.5mm 40-60
4.75mm 24-45
2.36 mm 15-30
0.600 mm 8-22
0.300 mm
0.075 mm 0-5

This work shall consist of providing, laying and compacting 38mm downgraded aggregate
Brick chips or picked jhama bricks free from any organic matter, clay and any other
objectionable matter. The aggregate shall be crushed Picked Jhama or mixed with first class
bricks. The crushed bricks shall comply with Water absorption does not exceed 16%, Los
Angeles Abrasion (LAA) value not exceeding 40 and flakiness index not more than 15% if not
otherwise mentioned in the drawing and the BoQ. Base course material shall conform to the
grading envelope and have a soaked CBR value not less than 80% when compacted 98% of
maximum dry density (Modified Proctor).
In addition to the material shall be well graded with the envelope having no excess or deficiency
in any size. The fraction passing the 75micron sieve shall not be more than 75% of that passing
the 600micron sieve. The portion of the material passing the 600 micron- sieve shall, if it is
plastic, have a liquid limit not more than 25 and a plasticity index not more than 4.
3.10.3 Construction Methods
The base-course materials shall be at the optimum moisture content (OMC) ±3% at the time of
placing. The brick aggregate and small quantity of sand shall be mixed thoroughly to obtain a
homogeneous mix complying with the grading requirements above. The graded material shall
be premixed with water at optimum moisture content in machine mix plant at the stack-yard
before carrying at site. Water shall be added during mixing to keep the mixed material moist
so as to prevent segregation during transportation. The mixed material shall be carried by tipper
with proper covering at site.
Base course material shall be at or near the optimum moisture content at the time of placing
and spread in layers of nearly equal loose thickness of 100mm, subject to the approval of the
Project Manager. Spreading may be carried out by using a motor grader or using a paving
machine, but machine laying is preferred. After laying all areas of segregated coarse or fine
material shall be corrected, or removed and replaced with material, which conforms to the
Specification.
Water shall be added during mixing to keep the mixed material moist so as to prevent
segregation during transportation. Prior to laying the base course, the sub-base shall be watered.

Page | 69
 The mixed base course material shall then be spread in two equal layers so that the compacted
thickness of each layer shall combine to conform to the thickness shown on the drawings or as
directed by the Project Manager. On the completion of the spreading and watering, rolling shall
commence.
Rolling should be done by a power roller weighing 8 to 10 tons or equivalent vibratory roller.
Rolling shall begin at the outer edge gradually moving towards the center of the road with the
rear wheel overlapping the shoulder. When the broken aggregates become firm, the roller will
be shifted to the opposite side of the road and the operation will be repeated. After both edges
rolled modestly firm, the roller will be gradually moved towards the center by overlapping
150mm of the rolled width until mix has attained the required density.
The base course shall be compacted to have 98% maximum dry density (Modified Proctor) and
soaked CBR to attain minimum 80%. The field density shall be checked at least once in every
100 linear meter of base course surface. Moisture content at the time of compaction shall be
the optimum moisture content ± 3%.
The finished surface of the base course shall in no place be more than 10mm from the designed
level and the mean of five measurements of thickness taken in any 200 meters long section
shall at least equal to or more than the required base course thickness.
3.10.4 Measurement
Base course shall be measured in cubic meters. It shall be based on the average width and
compacted thickness of base course as shown on the Drawings and the actual length measured
horizontally along the center line of the surface of the road.
3.10.5 Payment
The work, measured as provided above, shall be paid at the contract unit price. The price and
payment shall be full compensation for performing the work including furnishing and placing
the materials, supplying all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the
work prescribed in the section. Separate measurements should be taken at the bends if found
necessary.
Pay item shall be:

Item name Unit

Wet Mix Macadam (WMM) Base Course Cubic meter (compacted thickness)

3.11 WATER BOUND MACADAM (WBM) BASE COURSE

3.11.1 Description
This work shall consist of providing, laying, watering and compacting water bound macadam
base course on the prepared and accepted sub-base to the lines, levels, dimensions, and cross
profiles shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer in Charge in charge.
3.11.2 Materials
The base course material shall consist of crushed first -class brick and/or picked Jhama
brick aggregates similar to the gradation as shown in above Table 3.10.2 of these
specifications. The material shall be free from any organic matter, clay and any other
objectionable matter, well graded and of desired strength, mechanically "Keyed" or locked
by rolling and cemented or bounded together by the application of sand and water. The
bricks and picked Jhama bricks shall comply to sub-section 2.7.2.1 of these specifications.
The maximum nominal size of aggregate shall be 38 mm according to A8TM-C-131 Los
Angeles Abrasion Test (AASHTO Designation T-96) with a percentage of wear less than
40 at 500 revolutions and flakiness index as per B8-812-15% if not otherwise mentioned
in the drawing and BoQ.

Page | 70
 Material shall conform to the grading envelope shown in the Table 3.10.2 and have a
soaked CBR value not less than 80% when compacted to 98% of maximum dry density as
determined by Modified Proctor.
3.11.3 Construction methods
Prior to laying of base course the aggregate drainage layer shall be shaped true to cross fall or
super elevation and shall be rolled as necessary till the surface is smooth, firm and tight. The
prepared aggregate drainage layer shall be protected against damage until covered by the base
course.
Mixing of various coarse aggregates should be conducted in a stockyard to achieve the specified
grading. Various kinds of materials shall not be mixed together except that sand or naturally
occurring granular materials finer than 5mm size can be mixed with any of these materials to
meet the grading requirements. The mixing may be done by mechanical means or a combination
of manual labor and machinery. The materials shall be mixed thoroughly and uniformly to have
a homogeneous mass also satisfying the grading requirements. During mixing, water is to be
added to keep the mixed material moist, so as to prevent segregation during transportation.
The materials shall be spread in layers, the compacted thickness of which shall not exceed
100mm. However, the Engineer in Charge may allow higher compacted thickness up to 150mm
if he is satisfied that the specified degree of compaction can be imparted throughout such greater
thickness of layer with the contractor's equipment’s and methods used by the contractor. The
spreading shall be done using methods acceptable to the Engineer in Charge. The required
amount of water, predetermined from laboratory tests and field trials, shall be added and mixed
thoroughly. The moisture content of the material during compaction shall be guided by the
optimum moisture content (OMC) as determined from laboratory compaction tests but subject
to variations as needed for achieving specified density as decided by the Engineer in Charge on
the basis of trial compaction.
Rolling should be done by a power roller weighing 8 to 10 tons or equivalent vibratory roller.
Rolling shall begin at the outer edge with the rear wheel overlapping the shoulder. When the
broken aggregates become firm, the roller will be shifted to the opposite side of the road and
the operation will be repeated. After both edges rolled modestly firmly, the roller will be
gradually moved towards the center by overlapping 150mm of the rolled width until the entire
base course thoroughly compacted.
The base course shall be compacted to have 100% maximum dry density (standard) and soaked
CBR shall not be less than 80%. The field density shall be checked at least once every 100
linear meters of base course surface. Moisture content at the time of compaction shall be the
optimum moisture content ±3%.
The finished surface of the base course shall in no place be more than ±10mm from the designed
level and the mean of five measurements of thickness taken in any 200 meters long section shall
be equal to or more than the required base course thickness.
3.11.4 Measurement
Base course shall be measured in cubic meters of material complete in place and accepted. It
shall be based on the average width and compacted thickness of base course as shown on the
Drawings and the actual length measured horizontally along the center line of the surface of the
road.
3.11.5 Payment
The work as measured above shall be paid for at the contract unit prices for each of the items
listed below and shown in the Bill of Quantities. Payment shall be for full compensation for
performing the work including furnishing the materials, water, carrying out all, placing,
compaction, protection work, trials, tests and all other procedures described herein and

Page | 71
 providing all labor, tools, equipment’s and incidentals necessary to do the work.

The pay item shall be

Item name Unit

Water Bound Macadam Cubic meter (compacted thickness)

3.12 UPGRADING THE OLD EXISTING WATER BOUND MACADAM

3.12.1 Description
The top 75mm of existing Water Bound Macadam/Graded Aggregate-Sand Base Course shall
be loosened, reshaped and compacted, as directed by the Engineer in Charge, to the proper
grade and camber, supplying additional quantities of base course material if required to bring
the grading of the scarified existing material to the specification described in Article 3.11.2;
spreading the properly mixed and graded existing and additional materials on top of the
prepared and accepted exposed layer of the Base Course, compacting the spread materials to
the specified grade and camber to make the total thickness as per design to the line, levels,
dimensions and cross-section shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer in Charge.
3.12.2 Materials
The materials required for this item should meet the specifications described for Water Bound
Macadam
312.3 Construction methods
The top 75mm layer of the existing water bound macadam/graded aggregate-sand base course
shall be scarified or loosened by any suitable means.
The grading of the existing materials shall be checked, and additional base course materials
shall be added to bring to the required shape, size and quality as specified and mixed to bring
the grading of the mixed base course materials within the grading envelope specified.
The scarified surface of the exposed layer shall be reshaped, watered, and compacted to bring
it to the proper line, levels, dimensions and cross-section.
Additional materials to the specified grading and quality shall then be spread over the prepared
and accepted surface. The base course materials shall be spread in such a way that the
compacted thickness of the base course is not less than the design thickness. On the completion
of the spreading and watering, the surface shall be shaped according to the cross-section shown
in the drawings and compacted using approved mechanical compaction equipment.
Compaction shall continue until the material has attained the required density. The base course
shall be compacted to have 100% maximum dry density (standard proctor) and a soaked CBR
as specified in Article 3.11.3. The in-situ density shall be checked at every 100 linear meters of
recomputed surface.
3.12.4 Measurement
The existing material and supply of additional material shall not be measured. Only the accepted
base course compacted as specified shall be measured in square meters. It shall be based on the
average width and thickness of the base course shown on the drawings and the actual length
measured horizontally along the center line of the surface of the road.
3.12.5 Payment
This work as measured above shall be paid for at the contract unit price for the additional works
required to the base course. Payment shall be full compensation for performing the work
including but not limited to scarifying and picking up the existing top layer, supplying

Page | 72
 additional base course materials, mixing to the proper grading spreading the mixed base course
materials, watering, compacting to the specified density, grade, cross-section and thickness.

Pay item shall be:

Item Name Unit
Upgrading the old existing Water Bound Macadam/ Graded
Aggregate-Sand Base Course
(i) Scarifying and loosening the existing surface Square meter

(ii) Spreading and supply of additional material Square meter

(iii) Compaction Square meter

3.13 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR BITUMINOUS SURFACING

3.13.1 Description
3.13.1.1 General
This work shall cover the general requirements that are applicable to all types of bituminous
bound surfacing irrespective of gradation of mineral aggregate, grade and amount of
bituminous materials used. Deviations from these general requirements are indicated in the
specific requirements as set forth in the respective sections for each type.
The work shall consist of one or more courses of pre-mixed bituminous mixtures constructed
on a prepared and accepted base course or other roadbed in accordance with these
Specifications and the specific requirements of the type under Contract, and in conformity with
the required lines, levels, grades, dimensions and typical cross sections.
3.13.1.2 Composition of Mixtures
The bituminous mix shall be composed basically of coarse mineral aggregate, fine mineral
aggregate, filler and bituminous binder. The several mineral constituents shall be sized,
uniformly graded and combined in such proportions that the resulting blend meets the grading
requirements for the specific type under the Contract. To such composite blended aggregate
shall be added bitumen within the percentage limits set in the specifications for the specific
type.
3.13.2 Construction
3.13.2.1 Weather Limitation
Bituminous mixtures shall be placed only when the surface is dry, when the weather is not rainy
and when the prepared roadbed is in satisfactory condition. However, the Engineer in Charge
may permit, in case of sudden rain, the placing of mixture then in transit if laid at proper
temperature and if the roadbed is free from pools of water.
Such permission shall in no way relax the requirements for quality and smoothness of surface.
3.13.2.2 Progress of Work
No work shall be performed when there is insufficient hauling, spreading, or finishing
equipment or labor to ensure progress at a rate consistent with meeting proper temperatures and
rates of compaction.
3.13.2.3 Equipment
(a) Equipment for Preparation of Bituminous Binder

Page | 73
 Tanks or kettles for storage of bituminous binder shall be capable of heating the binder under
effective control at all times, to a temperature within the range specified. Bitumen shall not be
heated in open pans or drums. Suitable means shall be provided for maintaining the specified
temperature of the bituminous binder at all times. Generally, tar boilers with thermometer are
used to heat the bitumen.
(b) Thermometric Equipment
Armored thermometers in good condition, reading from 500 C to 2000 C shall be available at
the sites of mixing and laying at all times.
(c) Equipment for hauling bituminous mixtures shall have tight, clean and smooth metal
sides that have been sprayed with soapy water, thinned fuel oil, and paraffin oil or lime solution
to prevent the mixture from adhering to the beds. The amount of sprayed fluid shall however
be kept to the practical minimum. Any equipment causing excessive segregation of material by
its suspension or other contributing factors, or that shows oil leaks in detrimental amount or
that causes undue delays, shall upon direction of the Engineer in Charge in charge be removed
from the site until such conditions are corrected.
(d) The equipment for spreading and finishing shall be capable of spreading and finishing
the mixture true to the lines, grades, levels dimensions and cross sections
(e) The Contractor shall provide suitable means for keeping all small tools clean and free
from accumulation of bituminous material. He shall provide and have ready for use at all times
enough tarpaulins or covers, as may be directed by the Engineer in Charge, for use in any
emergency such as rain, chilling wind, or unavoidable delay, for the purpose of covering or
protecting any material that may have been dumped and not spread.
3.13.2.4 Preparation and Placing
(a) Preparation of Existing Surface.
Where the existing roadbed is broken or shows instability, the unstable material shall be
removed and disposed of as directed by the Engineer in Charge and be replaced with the same
mixture as specified for the next course, compacted to the standard and elevation of the adjacent
surface. The surface upon which the mixture is to be placed shall be swept thoroughly and
cleaned of all loose dirt and other objectionable material immediately before spreading the
bituminous mixture. If directed by the Engineer in Charge Tack coat is to be applied before
placing the next layer. If this has become necessary due to delays caused by the contractor in
starting the next layer this will not be paid.
(b) Preparation of Bituminous Binder
The bituminous binder shall be heated to the specified temperature (140°C-160°C for 60/70
or 80/100 penetration bitumen) in Tar boiler, kettle or tanks so designed as to avoid local
overheating and to provide a supply of the bituminous binder at a uniform temperature at all
times. The bitumen in the wet mix shall be @ 5.4% to 5.8% by weight of total mix.
(c) Preparation of Mineral Aggregate
The aggregates produced, whether by machine or by manual methods should be screened into
the major component sizes prior to recombining in the correct proportions.
The mineral aggregates for the mixture shall be dried and heated to a temperature of between
150°C - 170°C before mixing. The aggregates shall be heated to the temperature specified in
the applicable section.
(d) Preparation of Mixture
The heated mineral aggregate prepared above shall be combined in the amount of each fraction
of aggregate required to meet the mix formula for the particular mixture. The bituminous

Page | 74
material shall be measured or gauged and introduced into the mix in the amount determined by
the Engineer in Charge. Only sufficient heat shall be applied during mixing to maintain the
temperature of the mix without increasing the temperature. The proper amount of bituminous
material shall be distributed over the mineral aggregate and the whole thoroughly mixed for a
period of at least 60 seconds or longer if necessary to produce a homogeneous mixture in which
all particles of the mineral aggregate are coated uniformly. Mixing should not be carried out on
fire.
(e) Transportation and Delivery of Mixture
The mixture shall be transported from the mixer to the point of use in equipment conforming
to the requirements and transporting shall be such that spreading, compaction and finishing
shall all be carried out during daylight hours unless satisfactory illumination is provided by the
Contractor.
(f) Spreading and Finishing
Upon arrival at the point of use, the mixture shall be spread and struck off to the grade,
elevation, and cross-section shape intended, either over the entire width or over such partial
width as may be practicable. The mixture shall be laid upon an approved surface and only when
weather conditions are considered suitable by the Engineer in Charge.
(g) Compaction of Mixture
(i) General: Immediately after the mixture has been spread and struck off, the
surface shall be checked, and any inequalities adjusted. The mixture shall then
be thoroughly and uniformly compacted by rolling. Each course shall be rolled
as soon after being placed as the material will support the roller without undue
displacement or cracking.
(ii) All rollers shall be self-propelled, capable of being reversed without backlash.
Each roller shall be in good condition and worked by a competent and
experienced operator. Generally Tandem roller is suitable for B.C work; in
addition, Tire roller is also needed.
(iii) Rolling shall start longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center of
the pavement except that on super-elevated curves rolling shall begin at the low
side and progress toward the high side. Successive trips of the roller and
alternative trips shall not terminate at the same point.
Rolling shall start with a temperature of at least 1200 C and shall be discontinued if the
temperature falls below 900 C.
The speed of the rollers shall not exceed 4 kilometers per hour for steel wheeled rollers and 6
kilometers per hour for pneumatic tired rollers and shall at all times be slow enough to avoid
displacement of the hot mixture. Any displacements occurring as a result of reversing the
direction of the roller or from any other cause shall at once be corrected with rakes and fresh
mixture where required. Care shall be exercised in rolling not to displace the line and grade of
the edges.
Rolling shall progress continuously as may be necessary to obtain uniform compaction while
the mixture is in a workable condition and until all roller marks are eliminated.
To prevent adhesion of the mixture to the roller, the wheels shall be kept properly moistened,
but excess water will not be permitted.
Heavy equipment or rollers shall not be permitted to stand on the finished surface until it has
thoroughly cooled or set.
Any petroleum products dropped or spilled from the vehicles or equipment employed by the
Contractor upon any portion of the pavement under construction is caused for the removal and

Page | 75
 replacement of the contaminated pavement by the Contractor. The surface of the mixture after
compaction shall be smooth and true to the established crown and grade within the tolerance
specified. Any mixture that becomes loose and broken, mixed with dirt, or which is defective
in any way, shall be removed and replaced with fresh hot mixture, which shall be compacted
immediately to conform to the surrounding area. Any areas of one square meter or more
showing an excess or deficiency of bituminous material shall be removed and replaced. All
high spots, high joints, depressions, and honeycombs shall be adjusted as directed by the
Engineer in Charge.
(h) Joints
Both longitudinal and transverse joints in successive courses shall be staggered so as not to be
one above the other. Longitudinal joints shall be arranged so that the longitudinal joint in the
top course shall be at the location of the line dividing the traffic lanes. Lateral joints shall be
staggered a minimum of 250 millimeters and shall be straight.
The edges of the pavement shall be straight and true to the required lines. Any excess material
shall be cut off after final rolling and disposed of by the Contractor at the end of a day's work.
Just prior to recommencing operations, the sides of all longitudinal and transverse joints shall
be painted with hot bitumen to ensure a satisfactory bond between the old and new work.
3.13.3 Measurement
All work prescribed above shall be measured and paid for as provided in the respective sections
for each type of pavement. The quantity measured and. paid for shall always be the quantity
ordered with any permitted excess or the actual quantity used whichever is the less.
3.13.4 Payment
The work shall be paid for as provided in the respective section for each type of bituminous
layer.
3.14 PRIME COAT
3.14.1 Description
This work shall consist of the careful cleaning of the surface of the granular base material to be
primed and furnishing and applying bituminous material in accordance with these
Specifications to the areas shown on the Drawings and as directed by the Engineer in Charge.
3.14.2 Materials
3.14.2.1 Bituminous materials
Bitumen shall conform to the requirements (for the appropriate grade) given in Table
3.14.2.1 below. Bitumen shall be intended when material is referred to as “asphalt cement”,
“straight run bitumen”, “penetration grade bitumen” or by its penetration value (as for
example 60/70).
Table 3.14.2.1
Requirements for Penetration Grade Bitumen
STP Penetration Grade
ASTM Unit 60/70 80/100
Requirement
Min Max Min Max

Penetration at 25oc, 100g, 5

10.1 0.1 mm 60 70 80 100
Sec

Softening Point R&B 10.2 0C 48 56 45 52

Page | 76
 Flash Point (Cleveland Open
10.5 0C 250 - 250 -
Cup)
Ductility At 25oc D113 cm 100 - 100 -
Loss on Heating to 163oc for
- % wt - 0.2 - 0.5
5 hours
Penetration of Residue from
Loss on Heating
Test At 25oc, 100 G, 5 Sec, As
Compared to Penetration Before - % 80 0 80 0
Heating
Specific Gravity 1.01 1.05 0.99 1.04
Solubility In Carbon
(D4) % wt 99 - 99 -
Tetrachloride
Bituminous prime coat material shall be a cut back bitumen to be prepared byn cutting back
60/70 penetration grade straight run bitumen conforming to the requirements of ASTM/
AASHTO in the ratio of 100 parts by volume of bitumen to 40-60 parts by volume of kerosene
depending on the porosity of the surface and will be decided by field trials or as directed by the
Engineer in Charge. The correct amount is the quantity that is completely absorbed within 24
hours. The spraying temperature of the cutback bitumen shall be 100oC to 120oC.
3.14.2.2 Blotting Material
Blotting material shall be clean, dry, free-flowing sand not containing any cohesive materials
or organic matter. No more than 10 percent of the sand shall be finer than the 75-micron sieve.
3.14.3 Construction Methods
3.14.3.1Weather Limitations
Prime coat work shall not be carried out when the weather conditions are, in the opinion of the
Engineer in Charge, likely to adversely affect the stability of wet prime coat material. Such
conditions may include but shall not necessarily be limited to rain, low temperatures or storms.
3.14.3.2Cleaning Surface
Immediately before applying the prime coat material, all loose stones, dirt and other
objectionable materials shall be removed from the surface with a broom or blower as
appropriate. When so directed by the Engineer in Charge, a light application of water shall be
made just before the application of the prime coat.
3.14.3.3Application of Prime Coat
Prime coat material shall be applied by mechanical distributor or manually at a uniform rate
1.20 liters/square meter as directed by the Engineer in Charge, and at a temperature between
1000C to 1200C. An additional primer shall be applied where surface conditions indicate this to
be necessary, if the Engineer in Charge so directs. No further coatings shall be applied until the
prime coat has been cured.
The contractor may be required to lay a trial section of prime coat for the approval of the
Engineer in Charge with regard to the method of operations and to establish the optimum spray
rate for the prime coat to achieve adequate penetration. Following the approval of the Engineer
in Charge in writing of such trial section (s), the prime coat works may then be carried out
strictly in accordance with the approved method and spray rates and the specification.
The surfaces of structures and trees adjacent to the areas being treated shall be protected in such
a manner as to prevent their being splattered or marred. No bituminous material shall be
discharged into a borrow pit, gutter or kerb.

Page | 77
3.14.4 Maintenance and opening to Traffic.
After application of the prime coat there shall be a curing period of 48 hours or more, when
traffic shall not be permitted on the coated surface. In case of any damage caused by traffic, the
surface shall be redone at the cost of the contractor. The period of curing shall be extended, if
necessary, till the bituminous material has penetrated and dried and, in the opinion of the
Engineer in Charge, will not be picked up by traffic. At the end of the curing period, minor
areas where prime coat material is still not dry shall be treated by sprinkling, blotting sand as
necessary to avoid picking up of prime coat material before allowing traffic to use the coated
areas. For existing roads, the work shall be done over half width at a time, the other half being
used to carry the traffic.
3.14.5 Measurement
Prime coat shall be measured in square meter. Blotting material shall not be measured for
payment and shall be considered to be included in the rate for prime coat.
3.14.6 Payment
This work, measured as provided above, shall be paid at the Contract unit price. The price and
payment shall be full compensation for preparation of the surface and furnishing and placing
the materials including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the
work prescribed in the Section.
Pay item shall be:
Item name Unit
Prime Coat Square meter
3.15 TACK COAT
3.15.1 Description
This work shall consist of the cleaning and preparation of the bituminous surface specified, or
otherwise as directed by the Engineer in Charge, together with the furnishing and application
of the tack coat in accordance with these Specifications to the areas shown on the Drawings
and as directed by the Engineer in Charge. Tack Coat should be applied only in between two
bituminous surfaces.
3.15.2 Materials
Bituminous tack coat material shall be 60/70 penetration grade straight run bitumen
characteristics shown in table 3.14.2.1 and complying' with the requirements of ASTM /
AASHTO.
3.15.3 Construction Methods
3.15.3.1Weather Limitations
Tack coat work shall not be carried out when the weather conditions are, in the opinion of the
Engineer in Charge, likely to adversely affect the stability of wet tack coat material. Such
conditions may include but shall not necessarily be limited to rain, low temperatures or storms:

3.15.3.2Cleaning Surfaces
Immediately before applying the tack coat all loose stone dirt and other objectionable material
shall be removed from the surface with a broom or blower as appropriate.
3.15.3.3 Application of Tack Coat
Tack coat material shall be applied by mechanical distributor or manually at a rate of 0.5/.75
Kg/m2 and at a temperature between 1750C and 1850 C. Additional tack coat shall be applied
where surface conditions indicate this to be necessary, if the Engineer in Charge so directs.

Page | 78
 The surfaces of structures and trees adjacent to the areas being treated shall be protected in such
a manner as to prevent their being splattered or marred. No bituminous material shall be
discharged into a borrow pit, gutter or kerb.
3.15.4 Measurement
Tack coat shall be measured in square meter as shown on the Drawings or ordered by the
Engineer in Charge, complete, in place and accepted.
3.15.5 Payment
This work, measured as provided above, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per unit of
measurement stated below. The price and payment shall be full compensation for preparation
of the surface and furnishing and placing the materials including supply of all materials, labour,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Section.
Pay item shall be:
Item Unit
Tack coat Square meter
3.16 PREMIX BITUMINOUS CARPETING
3.16.1 Description
This work shall consist of supplying and laying of a premix bituminous carpet on a previously
prepared and primed granular base course in accordance with these Specifications and to the
lines, levels, grades and cross-sections shown on the Drawings. The bituminous carpeting shall
consist of a compacted single layer of surfacing which shall be of 25mm/40mm//50mm/
thickness.
3.16.2 Materials
3.16.2.1 General
The bituminous carpet material shall be a mix of bitumen, coarse aggregate and fine aggregate.
The bitumen shall be stored and handled in such a manner that risks of fire and other hazards,
and of pollution, are eliminated. Sufficient storage shall be provided to contain at least 7 days’
supply of bitumen to meet the programmed rate of construction.
The coarse and fine aggregate shall be stockpiled separately.

3.16.2.2 Bitumen
Bitumen shall be prepared by cutting back 60/70 penetration grade straight run characteristics
shown in table 3.14.2.1 and conforming to the requirements of AASHTO/ASTM. The
Contractor shall provide a supplier's test certificate and also arrange testing of the material in
BUER/KUET/RUET/CUET.

3.16.2.3 Coarse Aggregate

Coarse aggregate shall be the material component fully retained on 4.8mm sieve and shall
consist
of clean, naturally occurring or mechanically crushed stone or gravel or blended combinations
of both, free from decomposed stone, organic matter, shale, clay and any other substances
which, in the opinion of the Engineer in Charge, may be deleterious to the mixture. Coarse
aggregate shall satisfy the following physical characteristics:
- Bulk Specific Gravity shall be not less than 2.50
- LAA value shall not exceed 30 % (BS 812)
- Water Absorption shall not exceed 2%
- The Flakiness Index shall not exceed 35.

Page | 79
 Not less than 75% by weight of the particles of coarse aggregate shall have at least two fractured
faces.
3.16.2.4 Fine Aggregate
The portion of the aggregate passing a 4.8mm sieve shall be known as fine aggregate and shall
consist of natural sand, stone screenings or a combination of both. Fine aggregate shall be non
plastic, clean, hard durable particles, rough surfaced and angular and free from any substances
which, in the opinion of the Engineer in Charge, may be deleterious to the mixture.
Fine aggregate passing a 425-micron sieve shall have a Plasticity Index of not more than 4 (STP
T3.2).
3.16.2.5 Combined Mineral Aggregate
25mm thick compacted pre-mixed bituminous carpeting shall have 16mm downgraded crushed
stone chips. 40/50mm thick compacted pre-mixed bituminous carpeting shall have 25mm
downgraded crushed stone chips. They shall comply with specified grading requirement as
mentioned in Table 3.16.2.5 below.
Table 3.16.2.5: Gradation of aggregate mix for bituminous carpeting

25mm Normal BC 40/50mm Normal BC

Sieve Size
Percent by Weight Passing Percent by Weight Passing
25mm - 95-100
19.5mm 100 85-95
16mm -
12.5mm 75-90 58-77
9.5mm 50-70 45-65
4.75mm 25-40 25-40
2.36mm 15-27 15-30
0.600mm 8-18 8-18
0.075mm 2-8 2-8

For 25mm bituminous carpeting the bitumen in the mix shall be between @4.5% and 5.5% by
the weight of total mix or as determined by job mix design. For 40mm/50mm bituminous
carpeting the bitumen in the mix shall be between @4.5% and 5.5%% by the weight of total
mix or as determined by job mix design.
3.16.3 Construction Methods
3.16.3.1Weather Limitations
Bitumen carpeting shall be placed only when the atmospheric temperature in the shade is above
160C, and in dry weather except that in the case of sudden rain the Engineer in Charge may
permit the placing of mixture then in transit if the surface is free from pools of water.
3.16.3.2Aggregate Grading and Mixing
The aggregate shall be screened in the major component sizes and then shall be thoroughly
mixed together in the correct proportions to give a stockpile of mixed aggregate of the required
grading and in sufficient quantity for at least one day's carpeting work.
3.16.3.3Preparation of Surface

Page | 80
 The surface on which the bituminous carpeting is to be laid shall be swept thoroughly and
cleaned of all loose dirt and other objectionable material immediately before spreading the
carpet.
3.16.3.4Heating and Mixing of Materials
The bitumen and the aggregates shall be separately heated in the mixing plant to a temperature
between 140oC to 160oC before mixing.
Only Bitumen between 140°C to 155°C (Max)
Only Aggregate between 150°C to 170°C
Mix of Bitumen & Aggregate between 140°C to 160°C
The proportion of bitumen in the mix shall be as determined by the trial mix (see 2.13.4). The
heated bitumen shall be distributed over the aggregate and the whole thoroughly mixed for at
least one minute to produce a homogeneous mix in which all aggregate particles are evenly
coated.
The temperature of the mixed materials shall be maintained at between 140oC and 160oC and
laid at this temperature. Bitumen, or bitumen aggregate mixture, which has been overheated by
more than 100C at any time, shall be rejected.
3.16.3.5Spreading and Compacting
The mixed materials shall be laid to a uniform thickness. The thickness and camber shall be
maintained by the use of steel angle screeds at least 25% deeper than the compacted thickness
of the bituminous carpeting.
After lying, the materials shall immediately be compacted using Steel Drum Roller3-5 tons &
pneumatic multiple tire roller 8-10 tons to full compaction. The initial pass of the roller on the
bituminous premix shall be at the temperature specified above and shall be carried out with the
steel angle screeds in position. A minimum of five passes of the roller shall be made.
When the temperature of the bituminous premix falls below 90oC no further compaction may
be permitted. Material that falls below 90oC before it has been compacted as described may be
rejected and shall be replaced by new material to the required Specification by the Contractor
at his own expense.
The bituminous carpeting shall be fully compacted maintaining the proper grade and camber.
The compacted thickness as shown in the Drawing shall be uniformly maintained all along the
road surface. The resultant density of the compacted bituminous carpeting shall be between
2250 and 2350 kg/m3.
3.16.3.6Protection of Newly Laid Carpeting
Rollers and other mechanical plants shall not be allowed to stand on newly laid material.
Sections of newly finished work shall be protected from traffic of any kind until the mixture
has cooled to ambient air temperature. Traffic shall not be permitted on the newly laid surface
until at least 6 hours after completion of the layer.
3.16.4 Quality Control of Material and Work
Prior to starting work the Contractor shall prepare a trial mix in the laboratory and lay a trial
section of bituminous carpeting. Following approval by the Engineer in Charge work shall
proceed using the same mix formula as in the trial mix. If a change in material source or
character is encountered, the trial mix procedure shall be repeated. Marshall stability and flow
test procedures for the trial mix to be conducted in accordance with Section 9.4 of S.T.P.
The Engineer in Charge shall exercise control over quality of the materials incorporated and
works performed through quality control tests carried out to the frequencies indicated herein
under. The frequencies are the minimum, and the Engineer in Charge shall have the authority

Page | 81
 to have these tests at more frequent intervals where quality of a material or work is in doubt.
After final rolling cored samples with a minimum diameter of 100mm shall be obtained at a
frequency of one sample for 150m lengths. The results shall be tested for thickness and density.
The results shall be examined in a lot of 10 samples. The average thickness of the layer shall
not be less than that specified, and no sample shall have a thickness more than 5mm less than
the specified thickness.
The finished surface when tested under a 3m long straight edge shall not show any undulation
greater than 8mm in the longitudinal direction and 4mm in the transverse direction.
3.16.5 Measurement
This work shall be measured as the area in square meters of bituminous carpeting of the
specified thickness completed and accepted.
3.16.6 Payment
The work measured shall be paid for at the Contract unit price as shown in the Bill of Quantities.
The payment shall be full compensation for supplying, mixing, placing, and compacting all
materials, for carrying out all trials and tests necessary for the work and for all labor, equipment,
tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
Pay Item shall be:

Item Unit

25mm/40mm/50mm Thick Premix Bituminous Carpeting Square meter

3.17 PREMIX BITUMINOUS SURFACE WEARING COURSE

3.17.1 Description
This work shall consist of supplying and laying of a premix bituminous surfacing-wearing
course on a previously prepared and primed granular base course in accordance with these
Specifications and to the lines, levels, grades and cross-sections shown on the Drawings. The
bituminous surfacing wearing course shall comply with the specified grading requirement of
the relevant item of Road Design. The wearing course shall consist of a compact single layer
of surfacing which shall be of 25mm/40mm/50mm thickness.
3.17.2 Materials
3.17.2.1 Bitumen
Bitumen shall comply with section 3.16.2.2 of these Specifications.
3.17.2.2Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregate shall comply with section 3.16.2.3 of these Specifications.
3.17.2.3Fine Aggregate
Fine aggregate shall comply with section 3.16.2.4 of these Specifications.
3.17.2.4Combined Mineral Aggregate
25mm thick compacted pre-mixed bituminous surface wearing course shall have 16mm
downgraded crushed stone chips. 40/50mm thick compacted pre-mixed bituminous surface
wearing course shall have 25mm downgraded crushed stone chips. They shall comply with
specified grading requirement as mentioned in Table 3.16.2.4 below.
Table 3.17.2.4: Gradation of aggregate mix for bituminous surface wearing course

Sieve 25mm Dense 40/50mm Dense

Size
Percent by Weight Percent by Weight

Page | 82
 Passing Passing

25mm 100 95-100

19.5mm 100 85-95
16mm 100 -
12.5mm 75-90 60-80
9.5mm 60-80 53-73
4.75mm 35-55 35-52
2.36mm 25-40 23-38
0.600m 15-25 13-24
m
0.075m 4-10 4-10
m
For 25mm bituminous surface wearing course the bitumen in the mix shall be between
@5.0% and 5.5% by the weight of total mix or as determined by job mix design. For
40mm/50mm bituminous carpeting the bitumen in the mix shall be between @5.0% and
5.5%% by the weight of total mix or as determined by job mix design.
3.17.3 Construction Methods
The construction method of bituminous surface wearing course shall comply with section
3.16.3 of these Specifications.
3.17.4 Quality Control of Material and Work
The construction method of bituminous surface wearing course shall comply with section
3.16.4 of these Specifications.
3.17.5 Measurement
This work shall be measured as the area in square meters of bituminous surface wearing
course of the specified thickness completed and accepted.
3.17.6 Payment
The work measured shall be paid for at the Contract unit price as shown in the Bill of Quantities.
The payment shall be full compensation for supplying, mixing, placing, and compacting all
materials, for carrying out all trials and tests necessary for the work and for all labor, equipment,
tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
Pay Item shall be:

Item Unit
25mm/40mm/50mm Thick Premix Bituminous Surface
Square meter
wearing Course
3.18 DENSE BITUMINOUS SURFACING (PLANT METHOD)
3.18.2 Description
3.18.2.1General
This work shall consist of a surfacing of dense graded bituminous material, constructed on
a prepared aggregate base in accordance with these Specifications, to the lines, levels,
grades, dimensions and cross sections shown on the Drawings, or as required by the
Engineer in Charge.

Page | 83
 All the provisions of Section 3.13, “General Requirements for Bituminous Surfacing” shall
form a part of this Section of the Specifications unless otherwise stipulated herein.
The surfacing shall consist of one or two layers of the thickness shown on the Drawings.
If the surfacing is of two layers the top layer shall be denoted as the wearing course and the
lower layer as the base course.
3.18.2.2General Composition of the Mixture
The mixture shall consist of mineral aggregate added with 2% hydrated lime powder or
Portland Cement filler complying with section 3.18.3.6 of these Specifications, if needed,
coated with bitumen with the materials complying with Section 3.18.2 of these
Specifications and with Table 3.18.1 & Table 3.17.2.4. The mixture shall not contain more
than 15% of natural sand by weight of total aggregate. When the total thickness of
bituminous surfacing exceeds 75 mm, the material may be laid in two courses if directed
by the Engineer in Charge.
The base course shall be within the limits set by mixed classification in Table 3.18.1 and
the wearing course by mix classification in T able 3.17.2.4. The mix classification
shall be as specified in the contract; if the mix classification is not specified in the contract,
it shall be the one instructed by the Engineer in Charge.
When the total thickness of bituminous concrete is 50 mm or less the material shall be laid
in a single course within the limits set by mix classification in Table 3.17.2.4 above.
Table 3.18.1: Grading Requirement of Asphalt Base Course

Percentage Passing by Weight

Sieve Size (mm)
Layer thickness Layer thickness
(75mm-100m) (50mm-75mm)
50 100 100
37.5 90-100 100
25 75-95 100
19.5 - 90-100
12.5 35-61 56-88
9.5 - -
4.75 13-22 16-36
2.36 4-19 4-19
0.300 2-10 2-12
0.075 0-8 0-8
The ratio of total material passing the 0.075 mm sieve to effective bitumen content shall
be within the range 0.6 to 1.2.
All mixture furnished shall conform to the job-mix formula, within the ranges of tolerance
given below:
Passing sieves 10 mm and larger ± 8%
Passing sieves between 10 mm and 0.075 mm ± 5%
Passing 0.075 mm sieve ± 1%
Bitumen content (single test result) ± 0.50%
Bitumen content (three consecutive test results) ± 0.40%

Page | 84
 Temperature of mixture when emptied from mixer ± 15oC.
Temperature of mixture at delivery on road ± 15oC
These tolerances are applicable to individual test results. The mean value for a series of
test results should be as close as possible to the approved job mix formula. The grading
shall not be allowed to vary from coarser side on one sieve to finer side on another
sieve within the approved job mix grading envelope.
Each day as many samples of the materials and mixture shall be taken and tested as the
E n g i n e e r i n C h a r g e considers necessary for checking the required uniformity of
the mixture. When unsatisfactory results are obtained the Contractor should take
immediate corrective action. If the project manager is not satisfied with the actions taken
he may halt production, which will not be allowed to resume until the Contractor
demonstrates that the problem has been corrected.
Job materials will be rejected if they are found not to conform to the requirements of the
Specification.
In addition to meeting the requirements of the job-mix formula, laboratory samples
shall be prepared according to standard Marshall Methods as specified in STP 10.9 using
50 blows per face. The sample shall be of approved material to the gradation and bitumen
content stated and shall have the following characteristics.
1. Marshall Stability at 60oC not less than 550 kg.
2. Marshall Flow not less than 2 mm nor more than 4 mm.
3. Air voids in mix, base course, 3 – 5%’.
4. Air voids in Mix, wearing course, 3 - 5%
5. Voids filled with Bitumen, base course, 65 - 80%
6. Voids filled with Bitumen, wearing course, 70 - 80%
7. Voids in Mineral Aggregates:15 - 20%
The bituminous mix for base/wearing course, when subjected to Water Sensitivity Test as
per AASHTO-T283, the loss in strength shall not exceed 20% of the original mix. This
test shall be carried out at the time of mix design and subsequently as and when required
by the Engineer in Charge.
For road pavements carrying heavy traffic, the requirement for Marshall sample
preparation may be increased, at the discretion of the Engineer in Charge, from 50 blows
per face to 75 blows per face; the requirement for Marshall stability shall be
correspondingly increased to min. 820 kg.
3.18.3 Materials
3.18.3.1General
The materials shall conform to Section 3.16.2 of these Specifications with the additional
requirements noted below.
3.18.3.2Bituminous Materials
These materials shall conform to the requirements of 3 . 1 6 . 2 . 2 . The bituminous
material shall be of 60/70 penetration grade.
3.18.3.3Bitumen Additive
An adhesion and anti-stripping agent shall be added to the bituminous material where so
specified or when the Engineer in Charges so direct or approves. The additive shall be of
a type approved by the Engineer in Charge and the required percentage of additive shall
be thoroughly mixed with the bituminous material in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions, or as directed by the Engineer in Charge, for such time as is necessary to

Page | 85
 produce a homogeneous mixture.
3.18.3.4Coarse Mineral Aggregates
The provisions of Section 3.16.2.3 shall apply.
3.18.3.5Fine Mineral Aggregate
The provisions of Section 3.16.2.4 shall apply.
3.18.3.6Mineral Filler
Mineral filler where required shall consist of limestone dust, dolomite d u s t , o r similar
rock dust, Portland cement, hydrated lime, silica cement or other mineral matter from
sources approved by the project manager. It shall be non-plastic and free from foreign or
other objectionable material. It shall be dry and free from lumps and when tested by
means of laboratory sieves shall meet the following grading requirements:
Sieve Designation Percentage by Weight
0.600 mm 100
0.150 mm 95 - 100
0.075 mm 65 - 100
Mineral filler shall be considered to include any mineral dust naturally present in the
bitumen. Approval of sources of supply of mineral filler shall be obtained from the project
manager prior to delivery of the material. Samples and test results shall be submitted
for approval of the project manager at least 14 days in advance of its use.
3.18.3.7Mixture
Regular checks shall be made on the composition of the mixed material. The Contractor
shall take samples at either the batching plant or at the job site, as directed by the
Engineer in Charge, and shall arrange for Marshall Specimens to be prepared (STP 10.9)
and tested for stability and flow. Samples shall also be analyzed to determine the mix
composition, by extraction of the bitumen in accordance with STP 10.4 and aggregate
grading.
A minimum of three Marshall Specimens shall be prepared for each day or part of a day
that the batching plant is operated, and dense bituminous surfacing is laid and a
minimum of two bitumen extractions and aggregate grading shall also be carried out. If the
contractor can demonstrate good quality control of the plant, through consistent and
acceptable test results being obtained, then less frequent testing may be permitted, at the
discretion of the Engineer in Charge.
3.18.4 Construction Methods
3.18.4.1General
Construction methods shall conform to the requirements of Section 3.16.3 of these
Specifications subject to the following modifications.
3.18.4.2Preparation of Bituminous Material
Bitumen shall be heated to a temperature between 140°C and 155°C. The Contractor shall
submit a single definite temperature for the Engineer in Charge’s approval.
3.18.4.3Preparation of Mineral Aggregate
The mineral aggregates shall be dried and heated to a temperature between 150°C and 170°C
so that the surfaces of aggregates are clean and free of carbon and unburned fuel oil. The
Contractor shall submit a single definite temperature for the Engineer in Charge’s
approval.

Page | 86
 The mineral aggregates shall be dried so that no steaming, bubbling, foaming, brown
colorings or slumping of the newly produced mixture can be seen when the mix is
loaded on the trucks or placed on the road.
If any traces of insufficient drying are observed, the Contractor shall take such of the
following steps as are necessary to provide properly dried aggregates:
A) Maintain the level of the material in the hot bins above the two-thirds level.
B) Reduce the rate of cold feed.
C) Lower the slope of the drier as much as practicable.
D) Adjust exhaust fan, burner and air intake so as to provide longer flame
penetration into the drier.
If all the preceding steps have been carried out and the mineral aggregate is still not dried
to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge, double drying will be required for all or part
of the aggregate.
3.18.4.4Preparation of Mixture
The mixture shall, when has been emptied from the mixer, be at a temperature between the
absolute limits of 140°C and 160°C. A single definite temperature shall be submitted
for the Engineer in Charge’s approval.
3.18.4.5Spreading and Compaction
Unless the bituminous premix is laid directly onto a clean prime coat, a tack coat shall be
applied in accordance with these specifications in section 3.15 to the underlying surface
prior to spreading the base and wearing courses.
Non-inclusion of Tack Coat as a separate BOQ item or insufficient quantity of Tack Coat in
the Bill of Quantities (BOQ) shall not relieve the contractor from the obligation of
applying Tack Coat to the underlying surfaces.
For regulation courses the thickness of a compacted layer shall not be less than twice the
maximum stone size.
To avoid traffic disruption, the spreading and compaction is often carried out over half
the road width only. Rollers shall not be allowed to stand on newly laid material that may be
deformed thereby. Sections of the newly laid base course shall be kept clean prior to
laying the surface course and no traffic except in connection with laying the surface
course shall be permitted on the prepared base course.
The mixture shall be compacted as soon after being placed as the material will support the
roller without undue displacement or cracking and sufficient compaction plant should be
deployed so that the required degree of compaction is achieved before the mat has cooled
to a temperature of 107oC. Smoothing rolling may continue longer, if necessary, as long as
the temperature of the mat is above 90oC. The average field density of any bed of base
course and wearing course shall not be less than 98% of the laboratory density. No
individual density test result shall fall below 97% of the laboratory density of the Marshall
density.
3.18.4.6Joints
The work shall be organized so that transverse joints are kept to a minimum and, where
practical, only occur at specified positions (i.e., bridges etc.). All transverse joints are to be
cut back to well compacted full depth material to produce a straight vertical joint which
is to be painted with bitumen before laying of new material.
To attain a strong and even connection in the longitudinal direction, joints shall be
pre-heated in front of laying the adjacent bituminous mix. Alternatively, if approved by
the Engineer in Charge, the joint can be cut back and painted with bitumen.

Page | 87
3.18.4.7Protection of the Pavement
Sections of the newly finished work shall be protected from traffic of any kind until the
mixture has cooled to approximately ambient air temperature. Traffic shall not normally be
permitted on the newly laid surface less than 6 hours after completion of the pavement,
except with the approval of the Engineer in Charge.
3.18.4.8Pavement Samples
The Contractor shall, after final rolling and before opening the surface to traffic, cut samples
from the finished work for testing. Samples for the full depth of the course shall be cores
with diameters of 100 or 150 mm, as directed, and cut using an approved coring machine,
from the locations directed by the Engineer in Charge.
At least two samples for density measurement shall be taken for each day or part of a day that
the plant operates or if the output exceeds 100 tons per day, then at the rate of two per 100 tons
or part thereof.
Samples for analysis and other tests shall be taken from the surfacing when the Engineer in
Charge so directs. Where samples have been taken from the surface course, fresh material
shall be placed, thoroughly compacted and finished to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge.
3.18.4.9Surfacing Texture
The surface finish of the base course shall be close and tight, while the surface finish of the
wearing course shall be equally well bound, though where the mix permits the surface shall be
textured so as to enhance surface friction, but free from dragging cracks or other surface
blemishes. Back casting shall not normally be permitted but when dragging occurs under the
screed of the spreader, fine bituminous material may be cast over the surface to fill the dragging
cracks, providing that this is done before the initial rolling and providing that rolling is carried
out at specified temperature. Should dragging occur frequently the reason is to be determined
and rectified.
3.18.5 Measurement
The quantities of dense bituminous pavement measured for payment shall be the number of
cubic metres of accepted and completed surfacing, of the widths and thickness shown on the
Drawings. However, the Contractor should allow in his rates for additional material used for
forming sloping edges, waste, overspill, joints, cutbacks etc. Should the widths and/or
thickness of completed and accepted surfacing be less than indicated on the Drawings, the
quantities measured for payment will be based on the actual widths and/or thickness. No
adjustment in payment will be made where the pavement widths and thickness as laid and
approved are greater than those specified.
The surface profiles of courses will be used in the measurement of course thickness, unless an
alternative method, such as core thickness, is approved by the Engineer in Charge.
3.18.6 Payment
The quantities of dense bituminous surfacing measured as provided above shall be paid for at
the Contract unit rates. The rates and payments shall be full compensation for furnishing and
placing all materials including all labor, equipment, tools, trials, preparation of job-mix
formulae, testing, making good test holes and all incidentals necessary to complete the
work. Tack coat shall not be paid for separately except where specifically provided in the
Contract Documents.
When Tack Coat is included as a separate BOQ item in the Contract Document, but the
quantity is not sufficient to cover all the bituminous works under the BOQ, the cost of
quantity of Tack Coat required in addition to the BOQ provision shall be considered to be
included within the rates of bituminous layer. The contractor is advised to make necessary

Page | 88
 adjustments accordingly in his rates of bituminous layers.
Pay items shall be:
Item Unit
Dense Bituminous Surfacing - Base Course Cubic Meter
Dense Bituminous Surfacing - Wearing Course Cubic Meter
3.19 REPAIR WORKS
3.19.1 General
These general requirements shall apply to all pavement repair works undertaken to bring
existing pavements to lines, levels, profile and conditions prior to application of a bituminous
overlay or strengthening/protection layer. The repair works of the designated type shall be taken
up at locations and extent (length, width and depth) as shown on the Drawings or as directed
by the Engineer in Charge.
a) Where damaged seal coat is only by minor cracks or patches, the surface of the
damaged areas shall be prepared as directed by the Engineer in Charge and brought up to
existing level with suitable material.
b) In addition, in heavily traffic areas, and as decided by the Engineer in Charge in such
areas, 25mm Premix Bituminous Carpeting shall also be added
c) Where existing seal coat or other surface material is damaged excessively, all
unacceptable material shall be removed throughout. These areas shall thereafter be cleared to
existing base course level, properly cleaned and prepared prior to addition 25mm bitumen
carpeting throughout as specified in Section 3.16
3.19.2 Types of Repair Works
The repair works which will depend on the extent of damage or distress to the existing pavement
just prior to their start shall be classified under the following categories.
1) Ravel Repair: Raveling is characterized by stripping or separation of the aggregates
from the bituminous binder and is manifested in the form or pockmarks or eroded surface.
Repair of the resulting depression to an average depth not exceeding 15mm shall be classified
as Ravel Repair,
2) Depression Patching: Rutting of pavement under the vehicular wheel paths and
settlement of one or more of the pavement layers are manifested in the form of isolated or
continuous pavement depressions accompanied with or without loss of the existing bituminous
surfacing.
For the purpose of these specifications, the depression patching shall be classified under the
following three types:
Type A: Average depth of depression to be patched varying between 15 and 30 mm;
Type B: Average depth of depression to be patched in excess of 30 mm but not more than 50
mm, and
Type C: Average depth of depression in excess of 50 mm and the extent of depression
exceeding 10 sqm in a single location.
Depression having average depths in excess of 50 mm and area less than 10sqm in a single
location shall be classified as potholes described in Sub-Clause (3) below.
3) Pothole Repair: Repair of local areas affected by disintegration and loss of existing
pavement materials and showing up in the form of localized depressions or holes in the
pavement with average depth exceeding 50 mm and area in a single location less than 10sqm
shall be classified as Pothole Repair.

Page | 89
 4) Edge Repair: Repair of pavement edges broken down in chunks or frayed pavement
edges arising mainly out of poor compaction or lack of lateral support shall be classified as
Edge Repair.
3.19.3 General Requirements of Repair Works
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer in Charges, in all pavement repair works, the
Contractor shall observe and satisfy the requirements spelt out below:
1) Prior to application of any improvement, treatment or overlay to an existing pavement,
it shall be jointly inspected by the representatives of the Engineer in Charge and the Contractor
to identify the location, extent and type of pavement repair. Based on this, the Contractor shall
prepare a kilometer-wise list of all the repair works by type, location and extent, and get this
approved by the Engineer in Charge.
2) All the pavement areas to be repaired shall be marked in regular geometrical shapes in
advance of starting the works by the Contractor using paint marks on pavement and pegs on
earth shoulders and got approved by the Engineer in Charge.
The boundary lines for repair shall be off set by about 200 mm outside the affected areas.
3) Classification of the repair works by type shall be as described in Clause 3.20.2, and
any decision of the Engineer in Charge in this regard shall be binding on the Contractor.
4) The repair shall start and proceed in a systematic manner from one end or other
predetermined points as approved by the Engineer in Charge. For this purpose, the Contractor
shall prepare a work programme which shall be got approved by the Engineer in Charge in
advance.
5) In all cases of pavement repair, the existing pavement surface shall be thoroughly
cleaned of mud, loose particles, organic material and other deleterious matter using brooms,
compressed air, water jets or a combination of these as required. In all cases, the surface
cleaning shall be approved by the Engineer in Charge prior to application of any new
bituminous or other pavement material for repair purposes.
6) Surface of any patchwork or repair work shall be finished slightly proud (not exceeding
5 mm) of the connecting pavement portions and provide an even appearance. No part of the
repair work shall present an undulation in excess of 10 mm when tested with a 2-m long straight
edge.
7) Unless the bituminous binder in an emulsion, no repair work involving the use of
bitumen shall be done when it is raining or when the base is wet.
8) During all times of the repair work, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to
forewarn the public about the repair works and take all the necessary measures including
posting of advance warning signs, flagmen, etc. for safe passage of public traffic.
9) All surplus excavated material shall be transported by the Contractor to the spoil tips
and the pavement area kept clean and tidy on completion of the repair works.
10) All equipment brought to site shall be of the type appropriate to the type of repair work
and their selection is left to the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall
demonstrate the capability for repair works of each equipment brought to site, and any
equipment considered unsatisfactory by the Engineer in Charge shall be promptly replaced by
the Contractor.
Equipment normally found suitable for repair work is listed below as a guide to the Contractor
in the selection of the equipment, but the Employer does not guarantee that this will invariably
be approved by the Engineer in Charge.
Application of Tack/Prime Coats-4000 litre capacity bitumen pressure distributor with

Page | 90
 arrangement for part closure of spray bar;
- Plate compactors
- Hand operated pressure spray attached to a mobile bitumen boiler.
Compaction of brick aggregate and premix bituminous patching
- Double steel drum vibratory roller of 2.5T minimum weight.
- Tampers for compacting small areas.
3.19.4 Measurement and Payment
Compliance with the requirements set out in this Clause shall not be measured separately and
shall be considered incidental to the related pay items.
3.20 RAVEL REPAIR
3.20.1 Description
The work shall consist of patching existing pavement areas affected by raveling by premixed
bituminous material to an average depth not exceeding 15 mm. The work shall be performed
at designated locations and to lines and levels directed by the Project Manager In the
construction process the Contractor shall ensure that all the general requirements of repair
works, as set out in sub-section 3.19.3 are complied.
3.20.2 Materials
The materials required for ravel repair are:
- liquid bituminous binder for tack coat in accordance with sub-section 3.15
- bituminous premix material for patching in accordance with sub-section 3.16.2 of
these specifications.
3.20.3 Construction Methods
The area to be treated shall first be paint marked at site in regular geometrical shapes (diamond-
shaped/rectangles or a combination thereof) to the approval of the Project Manager It shall then
be cleaned of all loose particles and deleterious matter and thoroughly dried.
On the prepared surface, tack coat (sub-section 3.15) shall be applied at the specified rate by
means of hand-pressure spray devices attached to a mobile bitumen boiler. For small areas and
narrow strips, the Project Manager may permit the use of hand pouring cans provided the
Contractor demonstrates that uniformity in application rate and temperature can be e nsured.
The tack coat shall be applied in a day only to such areas as can be covered over by the premix
patch the same day. No traffic shall be permitted on the tack coat till the patch has been placed
and compacted in position.
After application of the tack coat, premixed bituminous material prepared in accordance with
sub-section 3.16 shall be spread and leveled. Manual method shall be permitted and the
Contractor shall employ sufficient labour with rakes and other hand tools to ensure uniform
spreading of the mix to the required levels. Soon after spreading, the material shall be
compacted with small vibratory roller not less than 2.5T in weight till a closed compact surface
is obtained and all roller marks are removed. Any area found to be inadequately compacted
should be compacted to the satisfaction of the Project Manager
3.20.4 Opening to Traffic
The ravel-patched areas can be opened to traffic after the bituminous mix has cooled down to
the ambient temperature.
3.20.5 Quality Control
The Project Manager shall exercise control over quality of the materials incorporated and work
performed on the following lines:
Cleanliness and dryness

Page | 91
 of repair surface - by visual observation
Tack Coat - in accordance with sub-section 3.15
Compaction - based on trial compaction using the compaction plant,
the Project Manager shall determine the minimum
number of passes and control the compaction process.
The number of passes shall be subject to a minimum
of 4.
3.20.6 Measurement
Ravel Repair shall be measured in square meter of existing pavement area over which the repair
has been done and accepted. A tack coat shall be considered incidental to the work and shall
not be measured separately.
3.20.7 Payment
Payment for Ravel Repair shall be at the contract unit price entered in Bill of Quantities. The
payment shall be in full compensation for the necessary marking, cleaning of the surface, tack
coat and furnishing and placing or the premixed bituminous materials including all labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals required to complete the work to the specification.
Pay Item shall be:

Item Name Unit

Ravel Repair to existing pavement surface Square meter
3.21 DEPRESSION PATCHING
3.21.1 Description
The work shall consist of patching depressions in the existing pavement caused by rutting or
settlement of one or more pavement layers by premixed bituminous material or a combination
of brick aggregate and premixed bituminous material. Depression patching shall be classified
under the following three types:
Type A: Average depth of depression varies between 15mm and 30mm. Premixed bituminous
material to be used for patching.
Type B: Average depth of depression in excess of 30mm but not more than 50mm. Premixed
bituminous material to be used for patching; and
Type C: Average depth of depression in excess of 50mm and the extent of depression
exceeding 10sqm in a single location. A combination of brick aggregate and premixed
bituminous material is used for patching.
In all cases, the work shall be carried out at designated locations and to lines and levels directed
by the Engineer in Charge. Further, the Contractor shall ensure that all the General
Requirements of Repair Works as set out in sub-section 3.19.3 are complied with.
3.21.2 Materials
Brick Aggregate: Brick aggregates shall be derived by breaking over burnt bricks
complying sub-section 2.7.2.1 and shall satisfy the requirements of sub-base course brick
aggregates conforming to sub-section 3.9.2
Prime Coat: Liquid bituminous binder for prime coat conforming to the requirements of
sub-section 3.14.
Tack Coat: Liquid bituminous binder for tack coat conforming to the requirements of
sub-section 3.15.
Bituminous Premix Material: The material shall conform to the requirements of sub-
section 3.16.2 of these specifications.

Page | 92
3.21.3 Construction Methods
3.21.3.1Patching Types A and B
The area to be treated shall first be paint marked at site in regular geometrical shapes to the
approval of the Project Manager It shall then be cleaned of all loose particles and
deleterious matter, and thoroughly dried.
On the prepared dry surface, tack coat shall be applied at the specified rate by means of
hand pressure spray devices attached to a mobile bitumen boiler. For small areas the Project
Manager may permit the use of hand pouring cans provided the Contractor demonstrates
that uniformity in application rate and temperature can be ensured. The tack coat shall be
applied in a day only to such areas as can be covered over by the patching material. Also,
no traffic shall be permitted on the tack coat till the patch has been placed and compacted
in position.
After application of tack coat, premixed bituminous material prepared in accordance with
sub-section 3.16.3 shall be spread, leveled and compacted as described for ravel patch in
sub-section 3.21. The compacted surface shall be well closed and free of roller marks and
other blemishes.
3.21.3.2Patching Type C
For this type of patching for depressions in excess of 50mm, the existing pavement shall
be cut along the demarcated lines to vertical faces. The bitumen bound pavement material
within the included area shall then be removed and disposed of to spoil tips. After this, the
excavation shall be extended to a uniform depth till a firm pavement layer is reached. The
bricks, brickbats and stone/brick aggregates removed by the excavation shall be salvaged
and suitably stacked for re-use in the pavement repair works.
The cut area shall be carefully cleaned of dust and loose particles and dried of standing
water before filling. Filling the excavated hole/trench shall first be filled with brick
aggregate up to a depth 25mm below the general pavement level. The aggregate shall be
compacted by small vibratory roller of not less than 2.5T in weight or plate compactor till
a density not less than 98 percent of MDD (Standard Proctor) is achieved. For assuring
effective compaction at the trench edges, compaction shall begin at the middle and proceed
towards the edges accompanied by addition/removal of aggregates to maintain the desired
levels.
After drying the brick aggregate patch, prime coat to the requirements of sub-section 3.14
shall be applied and cured.
After a minimum curing period of 48 hours, premixed bituminous materials prepared in
accordance with sub-section 3.16.3 shall be spread, leveled and compacted to the levels
slightly proud of the adjoining pavement levels, following the procedure described in sub-
section 3.18.
3.21.4 Opening to Traffic
The depression-patched areas can be opened to traffic after the premixed bituminous
material in the patch has cooled down to the ambient temperature.
3.21.5 Quality Control
The Project Manager shall exercise control over quality of the materials incorporated and
work performed on the following lines:
Brick aggregate filling for patch - in accordance with sub-section 3.9.2
Tack coat - in accordance with sub-section 3.15.2
Bituminous premixed material - in accordance with sub-section 3.16.2

Page | 93
 Compaction of bituminous premix - based on trial compaction using the
compaction plant, the Project Manager shall
determine the minimum number of passes
and control the compaction process. The
number of passes shall be a minimum of 4.
3.21.6 Measurement
Depression patching shall be measured as area in sq. meter over which the work has been
done and accepted for each type of patching. Reusable pavement material like bricks, brick
bats and stone/brick aggregate excavated from the repair areas (applicable to Type C
depression patching) shall be measured in their stacked position in cubic meter.
The brick aggregate used for filling the lower portion of Type C patch shall be measured
in compacted position in cubic meter. For the quantity calculations, depth of the filling at
a number of points in each location shall be measured to determine the average depth which
shall be multiplied by the width and length of the patch to arrive at the quantity.
Excavation of the existing pavement for Type C patch including salvaging reusable
material shall be measured as in-situ volume of the excavated pavement material in cubic
meter.
Prime coat, tack coat and the bituminous premix for patching shall be deemed to parts of
the patchwork pay item and shall not be measured separately.
3.22.7 Payment
Payment for the various types of depression patching and the other measured attendant items
of work shall be at the Contract unit prices entered in the bill of quantities. The payment shall
be in full compensation for the necessary marking, cleaning the surface, and furnishing, placing
and finishing the patch materials including all labour, equipment, tools and incidentals required
to complete the work to the specification.
Pay Item shall be:
DESCRIPTION Unit
Excavation of existing pavement including salvaging Cubic meter
reusable pavement material
Depression patching Type A Square meter
Depression patching Type B Square meter

Depression patching Type C Square meter

Brick aggregate for patch filling Cubic meter
Rebate to be given by Contractor for reusable Cubic meter
excavated pavement material
3.22 POTHOLE REPAIR
3.22.1 Description
The work shall consist of excavating the existing pavement in localized areas subject to serious
distress in the form of potholes, "alligator or map cracking" with loss of pavement materials,
settlements in excess of 50mm at individual spots less than 10sqm in area in a single location,
and in all other localized areas where the Engineer in Charge consider that the existing
pavement has failed and has to be replaced prior to application of any improvement treatment
and filling up the excavated area with compacted brick aggregate and finally with bituminous
premix material over a prime coat. The work shall be performed at designated locations and to
lines and levels directed by the Engineer in Charge. Further, in the construction process the
Contractor shall ensure that all the General Requirements of Repair Work as set out in

Page | 94
 Clause 3.19.3 are complied with.
3.22.2 Materials
Mineral aggregate : Mineral aggregates satisfying the requirements of 25mm base
course mineral aggregates conforming to Table 3.16.2.5 of sub-
section 3.16.2
Prime coat : Liquid bituminous binder for prime coat conforming to the
requirements of sub-section 3.14.
Bituminous premix
material : The material shall conform to the requirements of sub-section
3.16.2.
3.22.3 Construction Methods
The construction, which comprises:
- demarcating the pothole area to be treated.
- excavation of the area down to firm level.
- filling and compacting the hole with brick aggregate up to 25mm below the general pavement
level;
- application of prime coat; and
- filling and compacting the remaining 25mm depth with premixed bituminous material shall
be carried out on the same lines as specified for patching Type C. The only difference is that
while treated areas less than 10sqm shall be classified as pothole patching, those with areas
larger than 10sqm shall be categorized under patching Type C.
3.22.4 Opening to Traffic
Patched pothole areas shall be opened to traffic after the bituminous premix patch has cooled
down to the ambient temperature.
3.22.5 Quality Control
The control over the quality of the materials incorporated and work performed to be exercised
by the Engineer in Charge shall be on the same lines as stipulated for depression patching in
Clause 3.20.
3.13.6 Measurement
Pothole repair shall be measured as area in sq. meter over which the work has been done and
accepted.
Brick aggregate used for filling part of the pothole shall be measured in compacted position in
cubic meter.
Excavation of the existing pavement including salvaging if re-usable material shall be measured
as in-situ volume of the excavated pavement material in cubic meter.
Prime coat and bituminous premix material for patching shall be deemed to be parts of the
pothole repair work and shall not be measured separately.
3.22.7 Payment
Payment for pothole patching and other measured attendant items of work shall be at the
Contract unit prices entered in the Bill of Quantities. The payment shall be in full compensation
for the necessary marking, cleaning the surface, and furnishing, placing and finishing the patch
materials including all labour, equipment, tools and incidentals required to complete the work
to the specification.
Pay Item shall be:

Description Unit Of Measurement

Page | 95
 Excavation of existing pavement including salvaging
Cubic meter
reusable pavement material
Pothole repair Square meter
Mineral aggregate for patching Cubic meter
Rebate to be given by Contractor for reusable
Cubic meter
excavated pavement material
3.23 EDGE REPAIR
3.23.1 Description
The work shall consist of repairing and reinstating broken pavement edges by means of a
combination of brick aggregate and premixed bituminous material patching at designated
locations to the lines, dimensions and levels shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer
in Charge. The work shall comprise excavation of the broken pavement edges to regular lines
and down to firm pavement layer; providing lateral support along the pavement edge by means
of brick-on-end lining; filling the hole in the included area first by brick aggregate to a depth
25mm below the pavement surface and then last 25mm by premixed bituminous material over
a prime coat; and compacting the disturbed shoulders including finishing and clean-up of the
affected area. In the construction process the Contractor shall ensure that all the General
Requirements of Repair Work as set out in Clause 3.19.3 are complied with.
3.23.2 Materials
Mineral aggregate : Mineral aggregates satisfying the requirements of
base course brick aggregates conforming to the Table
3.16.2.5 of specifications sub-section 3.16.2.
Bricks on edge for lateral support : The bricks shall be burnt clay bricks of first class
complying sub-section 2.7.2.1 or picked jhama type.
These shall produce a clean metallic sound when
struck and shall be of uniform colour and size. Whole
bricks salvaged from pavement excavation for the
repair works shall be permitted to be used for the
purpose.
Prime Coat : Liquid bituminous binder for prime coat conforming
to the requirements of sub-section 3.14 of these
specifications.
Bituminous premixed material : The material shall conform to the requirements of
sub-section 3.16.2 of these specifications.
3.23.3 Construction Methods
The area at each location to be repaired shall first be painted at site in rectangular shape with
the inner line parallel to the pavement edge. The outer line of the repair area shall be the nominal
pavement edge, which shall be demarcated by means of a taut string line tied at the pavement
edge level.
After demarcation, the pavement in the included area shall be excavated to vertical edges and
to depths till a firm pavement layer is reached. On the shoulder side, a narrow trench about
100mm in width shall be excavated just outside the sting line can be fixed with the top of the
bricks at the level of the pavement edge.
The area between the brick-on-end line and the excavated pavement line shall be cleared of all
mud and loose particles and gradually filled in layers not exceeding 75mm in thickness and
compacted till a level 25mm short at the pavement level is reached. Filling of the top 25mm
depth shall be by compacted premixed bituminous material to Clause 3.16.2 on prime coat

Page | 96
 applied and cured in accordance with Clause 3.14 side by side, the disturbed shoulder outside
the brick line shall be filled up and compacted to the top of the bricks. In the construction
process, care shall be taken to ensure that the bricks are not disturbed by placing uniform lifts
of material on either side of the brick line.
Compaction shall be by plate compactors and the compaction shall continue till the surface is
well closed and free of protruding surfaces.
3.23.4 Opening to Traffic
The edge repair areas can be opened to traffic after the premixed bituminous material in the
patch has cooled down to the ambient temperature and the adjoining shoulder is reinstated.
3.23.5 Quality Control
The Engineer in Charge shall exercise control over quality of the materials incorporated and
work performed on the following lines:
Brick aggregate filling for patch : in accordance with Clause 3.9.2
Bituminous premixed material : in accordance with Clause 3.16.2
Bricks for Brick-on-end lateral support : Checking conformity with the specification through
visual assessment.
Compaction of patch material in
narrow trench : Control on layer thickness for brick aggregate and
conforming to the minimum compaction effort using
the equipment at site as determined by the Engineer in
Charge based on field trials.
3.23.6 Measurement
Edge repair shall be measured as area in sq. meter over which the work has been performed and
accepted by the Engineer in Charge.
Brick aggregate used for filling part of the edge trench/hole shall be measured in compacted
position in cubic meter.
Excavation of the existing pavement including salvaging of reusable material shall be
measured.
as in-situ volume of the pavement material in cubic meter.
Prime coat, bituminous premix patch material, and provision and installation of brick-on-end
lateral support shall be deemed to be parts of the edge repair work and shall not be measured
separately.
Lifting up of the existing depressed or eroded shoulder where required to be performed shall
be
measured in accordance with Clause 3.2.

3.23.7 Payment
Payment for edge repair and other measured attendant items of work shall be at the contract
unit prices entered in the Bill of Quantities. The payment shall be in full compensation for the
necessary marking, cleaning of the surface, and furnishing, placing and finishing the patch
materials including all labour, equipment, tools and incidentals required to complete the work
to the specification.
Pay Item shall be:

Description Unit of Measurement

Excavation of existing pavement including
Cubic meter
salvaging reusable pavement material

Page | 97
 Edge repair Square meter

Brick aggregate for pothole patching Cubic meter

Rebate to be given by Contractor for reusable

Cubic meter
excavated pavement material
3.24 PREMIX BITUMINOUS SURFACING WEARING COURSE-15MM THICK.
3.24.1 Description
The work shall consist of a premix bituminous surfacing wearing course applied to a prepared
and primed granular base course or over bituminous surfacing in accordance with these
Specifications or as directed by the Project Manager The thickness of the premix bituminous
surfacing wearing course shall be 15mm.
3.24.2 Materials
3.24.2.1 Bituminous material
Bituminous material shall be of 60/70 penetration grade straight run bitumen complying with
the requirements of ASTM/AASHTO. and shown in Table 3.16.2 above. The bituminous
material shall be minimum 5.00% by weight of the total mix or as determine by job mix design.
The bitumen shall be heated separately to a temperature of 140 0 to 1550C.
3.24.2.2 Aggregate
The coarse aggregates shall consist of 12mm down, 6mm downgraded crushed stone chips and
stone dust blended together to comply with the gradation as specified in Table 3.24.2. below.
The aggregate shall be free from any organic matter, clay and any other objectionable matter.
Where required to achieve the specified grading the aggregate shall be mixed with natural sand.
Sand shall be non-plastic, clean and free from any deleterious substances. The minimum F.M.
of sand for the sealing premix shall be 2.50. The aggregate shall be heated to a temperature
between 1500 and 1700C.
3.24.2.3 Overall Aggregate Grading
The mix of the aggregates and sand combined shall comply with the following grading given
in Table 3.24.2 below:
Table 3.24.2 Grading Requirements for 15mm Bituminous Wearing Course

Sieve Size Percentage by Weight Passing Sieve

12.5mm 100
9.5mm 95-100
6.3mm 85-95
4.75mm 65-85
2.36mm 35-55
600 micron 15-25
75 micron 3-10
3.24.3 Construction methods
Prior to heating the aggregate and sand shall be mixed together to give a stockpile of mixed
aggregate of the required grading in sufficient quantity for at least one day's surfacing work.
Bitumen and aggregates shall be heated separately at the following temperatures :

Only Bitumen between 140°C to 155°C (Max)

Page | 98
 Only Aggregate between 150°C to 170°C
Mix of Bitumen & Aggregate between 140°C to 160°C
Bitumen content 5% by weight of total mix

Material that has been over-heated at any time shall be rejected. No mixing of preheated
bitumen and aggregate should be done on fire. The 60/70 penetration grade bitumen of
minimum 5 percent by weight of total mix shall be used. The mixture shall be laid to a uniform
thickness which shall be at least 25% greater than the compacted thickness and immediately
compacted fully with a power-driven road roller to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge
3.24.4 Measurement
The premix bituminous wearing course shall be measured in square meters completed and
accepted by the Engineer in Charge. Measurement shall be based upon the nominal width of
seal coat at its top surface as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer in Charge.
3.24.5 Payment
The quantities measured, as provided above, shall be paid for in the contract unit shown below.
The price and payment shall be full compensation for supplying, placing and compacting all
materials, all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
Pay item shall be:

Item Name Unit of Measurement

Bituminous surfacing wearing course-15mm thick Square meter

3.25 KERB, GUTTER AND EDGE DETAIL

3.25.1 Description
This work shall consist of kerb, gutter, or combination of kerb and gutter, made of
concrete or edging to the road pavement using whole bricks and constructed in accordance
with these Specifications at the locations and in accordance with the lines, levels, grades,
dimensions and types shown on the Drawings.
3.25.2 Materials
Concrete shall be made with 6mm downgraded stone chips. Coarse aggregates shall consist of
clean, hard, strong, dense, non-porous and durable pieces of crushed stone and conform to BDS
243:1963 (Coarse and Fine Aggregate from Natural Sources for Concrete 1) or ASTM C 33:
(Concrete Aggregates). The large size boulders that shall be crushed and to be used for coarse
aggregate in concrete shall be composed of limestone, sandstone, granite, trap rock or rock of
similar nature and shall have the following properties:
Compressive strength (minimum): 49 MPa (5000 psi)
Specific gravity: 2.4-2.7
Unit weights: 2245 – 2566 km/m3
Porosity: 2.00 – 6.00 percent
Water absorption (maximum): 1.5 – 5 % by weight
The boulder shall be of uniform light colour as approved by the Engineer in Charge and shall
be free of thin laminations, adherent coatings, and deleterious substances. The LAA value of
course aggregate shall not more than 35%.
The fine aggregate shall have FM. 2.2, The fine aggregate for shall be non-saline clean natural
sand and have a specific gravity not less than 2.6 and conforms to the requirement of ASTM
C-144. It shall be angular, hard and durable, free from clay, mica and soft flaky substances. All

Page | 99
 sand shall be well washed and clean before use. A well graded sand shall be used for concrete
as it adds to the density of the mortar and concrete. Sands required for brick works needs to be
finer than concrete works.
Cement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO/ASTM conforming to BDS EN 197-1
:2003 CEM-II/A-M 42.5N. Bagged or bulk cement which has partially set, or which contains
lumps of caked cement shall be rejected. The use of cement reclaimed from discarded or used
bags shall not be permitted. Cement shall be delivered in bags as packed by the Manufacturer
with BSTI Certification mark with logo, number of Bangladesh Standard, name of the
manufacturer, name and type of cement, strength class, main constituents by %, weight of bag
packed with cement, day/month/year of manufacture, and country of origin.
3.25.3 Construction Methods
Concrete Kerb and Gutters
Excavation shall be made to the required depth, and the base upon which the kerb,
gutter, or combination kerb and gutter is to be set shall be compacted to a firm, even
surface. All soft and unsuitable material shall be removed and replaced with suitable
material.
Concrete shall consist of a mixture of Portland cement, fine and coarse aggregate, and water in
the proportion of 1:2:4. The compressive strength of concrete (fc) shall be 20 MPa at 28 days
standard cylinder. Kerb and gutter shall be cast to the size and dimensions as shown in the
Drawings. The steel forms shall be used for casting and shall be removed not less
than 72 hours after concrete has been placed. Minor defects shall be repaired with mortar
containing one part of Portland cement and two parts of fine aggregate. The curing of
concrete shall be at least for 7 days.
Repair will not be permitted on the faces and rejected portions shall be removed and
replaced at the Contractor’s expense. The finished work shall be true to line, grade and level
to within 5 mm and shall present a smooth appearance free from kinks and distortion visible
to the eye. When kerbs are to be placed on minor structures or on rigid pavement, tie bars
shall be inserted in the concrete as shown on the Drawings.
Edge Detail
The edge detail shall be as shown in the Drawings or as specified by the Engineer in
Charge. The edge of the pavement hard shoulder and soft shoulder must all the adequately
compacted. Any damage caused to be the pavement materials by compaction equipment due
to the contractor’s method of working shall be made good at the Contractors expense.
3.25.4 Measurement
The quantity measured for payment shall be the number of linear metres of the several
types and sizes of concrete kerb, edge kerbs, the combination kerb and gutter or brick
edging, completed in place and accepted. Concrete kerb, combination kerb and gutter
and brick edging shall be measured in place along the front face of the kerb.
3.25.5 Payment
This work measured as provided above, will be paid for at the Contract unit price per
linear metre for each particular item which prices and payments shall be full
compensation for all excavation, backfilling and tamping, furnishing and placing all
materials, including all labour, tools, equipment, forms, false work, centering and
incidentals necessary to complete the work.
Pay item shall be:

Item Name Unit of Measurement

Page | 100
 Cement concrete kerb stone Linear meter

3.26 ROAD MARKINGS

3.26.1 Description
This work shall consist of the provision and installation of reflecting road studs and
application of continuous or intermittent lines, stop lines, arrows, letters or figures as
shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer in Charge. The work shall include the
supply of all labour, tools and equipment, materials, traffic signs as necessary for the
safe and efficient completion of the entire work.
3.26.2 Materials
Materials for permanent road markings shall be thermoplastic material as described in
Section 3 . 2 6 . 2 . 1 or road marking paint as described in Section 3 . 2 6 . 2 . 2 . Kerb
markings shall be painted with road marking paint as described in Section 3.26.2.3. Road
markings shall be white or yellow as shown on the drawings.
3.26.2.1Hot Applied Thermoplastic Materials
The thermoplastic material shall be factory mixed, from an approved manufacturer and
shall be of a tropical grade suitable for application, by the means proposed, to the
specified road surfaces, and must demonstrate skid resistance appropriate to local traffic
conditions. The material shall comply with BS3262: 1987 ‘Specification for Hot-applied
Thermoplastic Road Marking Materials’.
The material shall be supplied in containers which do not contaminate the contents, and
which protect the contents from contamination and shall be stored in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Balloting (glass beads) may be incorporated in the mixture during the manufacture of
thermoplastic material. The quantity of balloting included shall be between 13% and 22%
by weight of the total mix and shall be counted as part of the aggregate. The Balloting
shall comply with BS6088: 1981 (1993) ‘Specification for Solid Glass Beads for use with
Road Markings’.
Alternatively, the Balloting (glass beads) may be applied to the surface of the thermoplastic
immediately application is complete. Application of the beads shall be at least 300 grams/
square metre or as otherwise directed by the Engineer in Charge.
3.26.2.2Road Marking Paint
All paints shall be road marking paint conforming to BS6044: 1987 ‘Specification for
Pavement Marking Paints’ and made by an approved manufacturer and suitable for
application, by the means proposed to the specified road surfaces.
The paint shall be suitable for applying by brush or mechanical means. The following
particulars of the paint shall be supplied:
1) composition (analysis by weight)
2) application (brush or spray)
3) type and maximum amount of reducer (thinner)
4) drying time (wheel dry)
5) setting time (to recoat)
6) recommended coverage (liters per linear kilometer of 100 mm stripe)
7) heat resistance i.e. maximum road temperature
8) details of any primer, undercoat or tack coat required.
The paint shall be supplied fresh and ready for use in sealed containers which shall be
stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

Page | 101
 If required Balloting (glass beads) may be applied to the surface of the paint immediately
application is complete. Application of the beads shall be at least 300 grams / square
meter or as otherwise directed by the Engineer in Charge. The Balloting shall comply with
BS6088: 1981 (1993) ‘Specification for Solid Glass Beads for use with Road Markings’.
3.26.2.3Reflecting Road Studs
Reflecting road studs shall conform to BS 873: Part 4: 1987 ‘Road Traffic Signs and
Internally Illuminated Bollards – Specification for Road Studs’. Road studs shall show red
or white and be uni-directional, bi-directional or Omni-directional, as shown on the
Drawings or as otherwise directed by the Engineer in Charge. They shall incorporate one
or more corner cube retroreflective lenses, and the area of lens facing each direction of
traffic shall be at least 300 square millimeters. The studs shall be capable of
withstanding impacts and no contact shall be possible between the lenses and the vehicle
tyres. The studs shall not project more than 20 mm above the level of the surrounding road
surface and the lowest part of the lenses shall be more than 5 mm above the surrounding
road surface. The studs may be either bonded to, or anchored within, the road surface.
The design shall be such as to ensure ample key to the road pavement with adequate load
distribution and such that it shall not be possible for heavy equipment such as road
rollers and tracked vehicles travelling in the direction of the road axis to meet with any
sharp edges whereby the removal of the stud might be facilitated.
3.26.3 Construction Methods
3.26.3.1Thermoplastic Materials
Preparation of Road Surface
The material shall be applied only on a surface which is clean and dry. It shall not be laid
over loose detritus, mud or similar extraneous matter, or over an old paint marking, or
over an old thermoplastic marking which is faulty. New surfaces must be allowed to
weather and compact for at least 72 hours before applying the marking. In the case of
smooth polished surfaces, e.g. smooth concrete, old asphalt surfacing with smooth
polished surface stones, and/or where the method of application requires or the Engineer in
Charge directs, a tack coat shall be applied to the surface prior to the application. The tack
coat shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the thermoplastic material and to
the approval of the Engineer in Charge. Faulty thermoplastic markings shall be removed
if required by the Engineer in Charge.
Preparation of Thermoplastic Material
The material shall be melted in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions in a
heater fitted with a stirrer to give a smooth consistency to the thermoplastic and such that
local overheating shall be avoided. The temperature of the mass shall be within the range
specified by the manufacturer and shall on no account be allowed to exceed the maximum
temperature stated by the manufacturer. The molten material shall be used as
expeditiously as possible and for thermoplastics which have natural resin binders or are
otherwise sensitive to prolonged heating, the material shall not be maintained in a molten
condition for more than 4 hours.
Laying of Thermoplastic Material
Markings may be applied by hand-screeding, hand propelled machine or by self-propelled
machine as approved or directed by the Engineer in Charge. After transfer to the laying
apparatus the material shall be maintained within the temperature range specified by
the manufacturer and stirred to maintain the right consistency for laying.
In the case of screeded application, material shall be laid to a thickness of not less than 3
mm or more than 6 mm, unless specifically authorized by the Engineer in Charge. In the
case of sprayed application, the material shall be laid to a thickness of not less than 1.5

Page | 102
 mm unless specifically authorized by the Engineer in Charge. In all cases, the surface
produced shall be uniform, appreciably free from bubbles and streaks.
The Contractor shall not proceed with the marking work until the equipment, method of
application, and rate of application, as established by a test section, have been approved by
the Engineer in Charge.
The work shall be carried out very carefully to a regular alignment in accordance with the
Drawings. Straight edges and templates shall be used if required by the Engineer in Charge.
Where applicable the Balloting (glass beads) shall be applied to the surface of the
thermoplastic immediately application is complete and shall be applied in a controlled
manner by use of a spreading device which will permit an even spread from a fixed height
of between 300mm and 400mm or otherwise as the Manufacturer may recommend. (A
wheel mounted, variable width, funnel applicator may be suitable). The loss of glass
beads after 3 weeks’ traffic shall not exceed 10 percent of the total applied.
Re-use of Thermoplastic Material
At the end of the day’s work, as much as possible of the material remaining in the heater
and/or laying apparatus shall be removed. This may be broken and used again, provided
that the maximum heating temperature has not been exceeded and that the total time
during which it is in a molten condition does not exceed the requirements.

3.26.3.2Road Marking Paint

Preparation of Road Surface
The paint shall be applied only on a surface which is clean and dry. It shall not be laid
over loose detritus, mud or similar extraneous matter or over a thermoplastic marking or
over an old paint marking which is faulty or incompatible with the paint being applied. New
surfaces must be allowed to weather and compact for at least 72 hours before applying
the marking. If a primer or undercoat is necessary to ensure proper adhesion of the
marking paint to the road surface without bleeding or discoloration, the primer or
undercoat shall be fully compatible with the marking paint and the road surface, and shall
be applied only if, and at the rate of application approved by the Engineer in Charge.
Preparation of Paint
All cold-applied paint shall be thoroughly field mixed before applying in order to keep the
pigments in uniform suspension. Hot-applied paints shall be heated in a properly designed
heater, to the correct laying temperature at which it shall be maintained as required for the
method of application. The paint shall on no account be allowed to exceed the maximum
temperature specified by the paint manufacturer. The use of thinner or other additives
shall not be permitted unless otherwise agreed to by the Engineer in Charge.
Laying of Paint
Markings shall be applied by brush, spray, hand-propelled or self-propelled machine
according to the marking configuration and the type of paint approved for use or as
directed by the Engineer in Charge. The rate of application of paint for each coat shall
be that recommended by the manufacturer and shall produce a minimum total cover
rate of un-thinned paint of 0.5 litre per square metre, unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer in Charge.
Where a spray machine is to be used the Contractor shall not proceed with the marking
work until the equipment, method of application, and rate of application, as established by

Page | 103
 a test section, have been approved by the Engineer in Charge.
When more than one coat is used, the succeeding coat shall not be applied until the
previous coat has fully set.
The work shall be carried out very carefully to a regular alignment in accordance with the
Drawings. Straight edges and templates shall be used if required by the Engineer in Charge.
Where applicable the Ballotini (glass beads) shall be applied to the surface of the paint
immediately application is complete and shall be applied in a controlled manner by use of
a spreading device which will permit an even spread from a fixed height of between
300mm and 400mm or otherwise as the Manufacturer may recommend. (A wheel
mounted, variable width, funnel applicator may be suitable). The loss of glass beads after 3
weeks of traffic shall not exceed 10 percent of the total applied.
Protection of Paint Markings
All markings shall be protected from traffic until they have dried sufficiently.
3.26.3.3Reflecting Road Studs
Road studs shall not be installed over road markings or joints in the road surface. The
road surface shall be cleaned, and dust, oil, grease and other contaminants removed.
New surfaces shall be allowed to compact and weather for at least 72 hours prior to the
installation of the studs. Acceptable methods of fixing include bonding with an adhesive;
anchoring with a road nail; and setting the stud into a drilled cavity in the pavement.
However, the method of fixing, including any adhesive or grout used, must be suitable for
the specified road surface and the tropical climate. The studs shall be fixed in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions. Studs which become loose or free during the defect’s
liability period will be considered a defect.
3.26.3.4Tolerances
All forms of line marking, and road studs shall be subject to the following tolerances where
applicable:
a) Longitudinal lines such as centre lines, edge lines and other lines of a continuous
nature shall not vary from the design longitudinal dimensions by more than 10%.
Transverse dimensions (line width) shall have a tolerance of – 0% + 10%.
b) Longitudinal lines such as centre lines, edge lines, other lines of a continuous nature
and road studs shall not vary from the designed alignment by more than 300mm on a curve
or 150mm on a straight section.
c) Transverse and other incidental road markings shall not vary from the specified
dimensions by more than ± 5% of the overall dimension. Alignments shall not vary by
more than 20mm from the designed alignment except in the case of centre line chainage
location which shall not vary by more than 0.5 metres.
3.26.3.5Defective Materials and Workmanship
Materials which are defective or have been applied in an unsatisfactory manner or to
incorrect dimensions or in a wrong location shall be removed, the road pavement made
good, and the materials replaced, reconstructed and/or properly located, all at the
Contractor’s expense and to the satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge.
3.26.3.6Protection of Traffic
The Contractor shall protect pedestrian, vehicular and other traffic adjacent to the working
area against damage or disfigurement by construction equipment, tools and materials or
by splatters, splashes and smirches of paint or other construction materials and shall
during the course of the work provide and maintain adequate signs and signals for the

Page | 104
 warning and guidance of traffic.
3.26.4 Measurement
Markings shall be measured for payment by the area in square metres completed and
accepted in place. Where the width or length of laid marking proves to be greater than that
specified and is accepted by the Engineer in Charge, the specified width or length shall
be used when calculating areas for payment. Where the width or length of laid marking
proves to be less than that specified and is accepted by the Engineer in Charge, the actual
width or length of laid marking shall be used when calculating areas for payment.
Temporary markings will not be measured as such, the payment therefore shall be
considered incidental to the lump sum for maintenance of traffic.
Reflecting road studs shall be measured by the actual number of studs supplied, installed
and accepted.
3.26.5 Payment
The work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the Contract unit prices for
each of the items listed in the Bill of Quantities.
The payment shall be full compensation for providing and applying the materials including
all labour, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
Pay items shall be:

Item Name Unit

Square Metre
Road Marking - Thermoplastic Material
Square Metre
Road Marking - Road Marking Paint
Number
Reflecting Road Studs

3.27 RIGID PAVEMENT

3.27.1 Description
This work, construction of rigid pavement shall consist of supplying, bending placing of
reinforcement, concreting providing shutters/form work as necessary, curing the concrete
pavement for 28 days with sprinkling water. The work may be necessary where the road
pavement is submerged with flood water or with normal monsoon water logging and the road
surface remains under water for couple of weeks and the alternate alignment is neither suitable
nor economically and socially possible or feasible. The work shall be undertaken as per
drawing, design, keeping the line, length, thickness, strength and level as indicated in the
drawing or as per direction of the Project Manager. The concrete shall consist of a mixture of
Portland cement, coarse, fine aggregates and water (free from salinity).
3.27.2 Materials for Rigid Pavement
2.27.2.1Cement
Cement shall conform to the requirements of Bangladesh Standard (BDS) Specification EN
197-1: 2003 or ASTM C-150 or similar approved standard. Any of the following two types
shall be used according to desired compressive strength.
a) Portland Cement EN 197-1: 2003 CEM -I 52.5N or ASTM C-150 Type-1
b) Portland Composite Cement, EN 197-I: 2003-CEM-II/AM 42.4N or ASTM C-618
If not otherwise mentioned, CEM-1 type shall be used in mix design of 30 MPa concrete and
CEM-II shall be used for 17 MPa, 20Mpa and 25 MPa concrete for RCC pavement and

Page | 105
 manufacturing of kerb stone. Bagged or bulk cement which has partially set or which contains
lumps of caked cement shall be rejected. The use of cement reclaimed from discarded or used
bags shall not be permitted. Cement shall be delivered in bags as packed by the Manufacturer
with BSTI Certification mark with logo, number of Bangladesh Standard, name of the
manufacturer, name and type of cement, strength class, main constituents by %, weight of bag
packed with cement, day/month/year of manufacture, and country of origin. Cement shall be
in accordance with sub-section 2.7.2.2 of these specifications.
3.27.2.2 Water
The water used in mixing and curing concrete shall be in accordance with sub-section
2.7.2.4 of these specifications. S aline/chloride content in water for construction shall not
exceed 500 ppm (parts per million)
3.27.2.3Fine Aggregate
Fine aggregate shall conform to BDS 243:1963 or ASTM C33 and comply sub-section 2.8.2.3
of these specifications. Fine aggregate shall be either non-saline natural sand, composed of
clean, hard, durable uncoated particles resulting from the disintegration of siliceous and/or
calcareous rocks.
3.27.2.4Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregate for all types of road concrete shall consist of crushed stone and conform
to the requirements of ASTM C-33 and sub-section 2.8.2.4 of these specifications. Coarse
aggregate shall be clean, free from dust and other deleterious material preferably stone chips
from Modhypara Dinajpur.
3.27.2.5 Reinforcement
Reinforcement for RCC road shall be RB-400/ 400W ribbed or deformed bar conform to BDS
ISO 6935-2:2016 ASTM A-615M-88 & ASTM A-706 or standard subsequently released
from BSTI and as per specification of section 2.8.2.6 including straightening, removing ruts,
cleaning, cutting, hooking, bending, lapping and or welding wherever require as directed by
the Project Manager, placing in position, tied with 22 BWG black annealed binding wire double
fold, supplying and placing with proper cover blocks (1:1), supports, chairs, spacers, splices or
laps etc.,. The reinforcement shall comply with sub-section 2.8.2.6 of these specifications.
Reinforcing steel shall be stacked with each dia type of bars stockpiled separately under shed
to avoid effect of rain and dew. Stockpiling of huge quantity of steel bar shall be avoided to
save it from rusting and deterioration through oxidation. Sufficient quantity required for single
operation of casting should be collected from one approved source and stored at site prior to
rod bending and binding work. Reinforcing bars shall not be stockpiled on soil. A raised
platform shall be prepared by laying brick flat soling over which reinforcing bars shall be
stacked in orderly manner.
3.27.2.6 Admixtures:
Chemical admixture for concrete, shall comply to ASTM-C -494. The type of admixture shall
be used in concrete shall conform to the requirements as mentioned in sub-section 2.8.2.5 of
these specifications.
3.27.2.7 Separation Membrane:
A separation membrane shall have to provide between concrete slab and sub-base to obviate
stresses developing at the interface as a result of temperature changes in the concrete slab. This
shall be 0.18mm thick impermeable plastic/polythene sheet laid flat without creases and nailed
to the lower layer with concrete nails. Wherever overlap of plastic/ polythene sheets is
necessary, the same shall be at least 300mm and any damaged sheeting shall be replaced at the
contractor’s coat.

Page | 106
3.27.3 Composition of concrete
3.27.3.1Strength of concrete
This work shall consist of manufacturing concrete for all or part of the road of required grade
and type as provided in these Specifications and of the form, dimensions, lines, grades and
design shown on the plans. Concrete shall consist of a mixture of Portland cement, fine and
coarse aggregate and water. The proportion in which the various ingredients shall be used in
the concrete mix, shall be designed in accordance with the specified strength and suitable
workability. For corrosion protection, the maximum water-soluble chloride ion content shall
be 0.15 percent by weight of cement. Maximum water/cement ratio for RCC members shall be
0.45/0.45. Material shall conform to the requirements specified below and in the relevant
sections of the Material Specifications. Construction shall be according to these specifications.
The Contractor shall follow the standards of BDS and American Society of Testing Materials
(ASTM) for materials and BNBC 93 and Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
ACI 318-08 for Specification of works. In case of differences between specifications contained
in this book and those of ASTM/ACI/BDS/BNBC, the specifications specified in this book shall
stand. Concrete of different class is listed below:
Class of

Minim. Concrete
Strength (28 day
Specified Comp.

Aggregates

Water cement
Concrete
strength)

(RCC) Admix. Fine Coarse

ratio

ratio
Cement Type (min.)
Grade Max

2003 CEM-
II/A-M A or F 38 mm down LAA-30
25 MPa FM-2.5 0.4 1:1.5:3
25SCBP 42.5N stone chips
Type-II
CEM-I
52.5N 38 mm down Mix Mix
30SCBP 30 MPa F/G F.M 2.5 LAA-30
ASTM C-150 stone chips Design Design
Type-1

3.27.3.2 Trial Mixes

After the Contractor has received approval for the cement and aggregate to be used, he shall
prepare trial mixes with concrete of designed proportions to prove and establish workability,
strength, water cement/ratio, surface criteria etc. Methods of transporting fresh concrete and
the compaction equipment shall be considered. The trial mixes shall be made and compacted
in the presence of the Project Manager, using the same type of plant and equipment as will be
used for the Works. The design of concrete mix shall be carried out in a recognized material-
testing laboratory as directed by the Project Manager. The following requirements shall be
fulfilled in proportioning the ingredients and designing the concrete mix:
(1) Workability and consistency are achieved for proper placement into form and around
reinforcement, without segregation & excessive bleeding. The allowable slump is between
75mm to 100mm.
ii). The minimum amount of cement to be used by the Contractor shall be 385kg/m3 for
25SCBP and 440kg/m3 for 30SCBP concrete.
(iii) Concrete proportion including water cement ratio shall be as above or as established on the
basis of trial mix with materials to be used.
iv)Resistance to weather and other special exposure conditions are attained to meet the
durability requirements.

Page | 107
 v)No concrete shall be placed in the works until the relevant mix has been approved by the
Project Manager.
vi)When a mix has been approved, no variations shall be made in the proportions, the sources
of cement and aggregates, or in the types, size and grading of the aggregates, water-cement
ratio without the approval of the Project Manager.
(vii)When (after approval of a mix by the Project Manager) the seasonal climatic conditions
have changed significantly, or different sources of cement or aggregate are to be used, the
Contractor shall make any necessary modifications to mix design and carry out further trials
and resubmit the mix design (whether amended or not) for re-approval by the Project Manager.
(viii). The Contractor shall allow an adequate period for design of mixes, trials and approval
before concrete is to be placed in the works.
(ix). Admixture of approved quality and brand may be permitted in concrete mixes to reduce
water-cement ratio and increase the workability of the concrete. Prior approval of Project
Manage must be received before the use of any admixtures in concrete.
When the Contractor intends to purchase factory-made precast concrete units, trial mixes may
be dispensed with provided that evidence is given to satisfy the Project Manager that the
factory regularly produces concrete which complies with the Specifications. The evidence shall
include details of mix proportions, water/cement ratios, slump tests and strengths obtained at
28 days.
3.27.4 Construction Methods
3.27.4.1 Form Work
The formwork shall be of steel and shall be built mortar tight and rigid enough to keep the concrete in
position during placing, compacting, setting and hardening. The form work shall be rigidly constructed,
supported on a firm-bearing base, and braced so as to retain its shape and position and shall be set to the
specified lines and levels. Formwork shall be constructed so that loose material can be removed from
inside without disturbing the Formwork.
Except where otherwise directed, all forms are coated with oil on the concrete face side. The oil used
must be non-staining and have no adverse effect on paint or any other finish. All formworks shall be
approved by the Project Manager before placing concrete commences.
The formwork shall be sprinkled with cold water just prior to placement of concrete an d forms shall be
removed only after the concrete has set for at least 12 hours. Forms shall be carefully removed without
causing damage to the edge of the pavement. After removal of forms, the ends shall be cleaned any
honeycombed area pointed with 1:2 cement sand ration mortar, after that sides of the slab shall be
covered with earth to the level of slab.
3.27.4.2Joints
Transverse expansion joints shall be placed 6.1m maximum spacing on regular pavement.
Joints must be placed at 3.0m spacing within any pavement structure/ fixed objects and
unsymmetrical intersections. Construction joints if required shall be placed at work extends
when joining on to adjacent rigid pavement. As far as possible, joints shall be at right angles to
the pavement edge. Also, the transverse joints shall be provided in line with the joints in the
slab of the adjoining lane.
3.27.4.3Handling and Placing of Concrete
For concrete slab pavement construction, the sub-base layer of the road shall be moistened
sprinkling water before placing concrete for pavement. Concrete shall be placed in full depth
at a time as specified and designed. Immediately after placing the reinforcement mesh, dowel
bar for joints and shall be placed before the concreting starts keeping the clearance of
reinforcement as per design concrete shall be compacted to achieve the specified thickness as
per design drawing. Concreting of slabs shall be done for staggered bays and the expansion and
contraction joints shall be kept with separation planks of thickness 13mm, which shall be taken
out after initial setting of concrete.
3.27.4.4Compaction

Page | 108
 For concrete slab pavement construction, the compaction shall be done with a mechanical
vibrator and finally with a wooden tamping beam of about 3m long and of compacting fa ce
width 100mm and to shape conforming to the camber or lateral slope as specified in the design
and to yield a rough surface to form skid resistance of the pavement to traffic.
3.27.4.5Curing
As soon as the concrete surface is compacted, curing shall commence. The initial curing shall
be done by covering the pavement surface entirely with wetted burlap or jute mats. The
covering shall be maintained fully wetted and in position for 24 hours after the concrete has
been placed. The burlap shall be placed from suitable arrangement without having to walk on
then freshly laid concrete.
After initial curing the final curing shall be done by ponding. Ponding shall consist of
constructing earthen dykes of clay or mortar of about 50mm height transversely and
longitudinally, spreading a blanket layer of sand over the exposed pavement and thoroughly
wetting for 21 days.
3.27.4.6 Sealing of Joints
No sealing of joint shall be undertaken before 21 days of construction. All joins in the surface
slabs shall be sealed using hot poured flexible bitumen sealant and joints shall be sealed when
grooves are dry and clean and free from foreign object or loose material. Precautions shall be
taken so that the sealant shall not spill on the exposed surface of the concrete. The sealant shall
be poured from a kettle having a spout.
3.27.4.7 Measurement
The work shall be measured in volume of concrete in cubic meter completed, cured and
accepted. The reinforcement of all sizes of steel bar used and accepted shall be measured in
kilogram.
3.27.4.8 Dowel Bar at Construction Joints
The dowel bar of specified diameter shall be plain mild steel bar. Dowel bars shall be 300mm
spacing. Diameter of dowel bars and lengths shall be as shown in Table below:
Pavement Dowel bar Dowel bar Dowel bar length
thickness diameter spacing
175mm 25mm 300mm 500mm
200mm 28mm 300mm 500mm
250mm 32mm 300mm 500mm
300mm 40mm 300mm 500mm
3.27.4.9 Placing of Dowel Bar
The Dowel bar of specified size shall be placed at specified spacing as mentioned in the design
at the middle of the slab thickness. One half of the dowel bar shall be embedded in concrete of
one panel and the other half of the bar shall be wrapped with thin sheet (2mm thick) of sponge
of length 20mm more than that of the one half of the Dowel bar, so as to form a small gap
between the concrete of the adjacent panel (in the longitudinal direction) and the dowel bar for
free movement and expansion.
3.27.4.10 Payment
The accepted work measured shall be paid for at the contract unit prices per cubic meter of
concrete as shown in the BOQ. The payment shall be full compensation for construction of the
rigid pavement including charges for all equipment, construction and removal shutters/form
works, material used and all labour, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work.

Page | 109
 Pay items shall be:
Description Unit of Measurement
Preparation of bed, casting concrete, curing the same, Cubic meter
protecting the work and removal of shutters.
Supply, bending, binding and placing the Kilogram
reinforcement.

3.28 uPVC Pipes and Fittings

3.28.1 Description
The work shall cover the supply and laying/installation of unplasticized polyvinyl chloride
(uPVC) pipes of different diameter for wastewater, utility duct and vent pipes with supply of
fittings as may be necessary according to the requirement, drawings, and direction of the
Engineer in charge. The material from which the pipes are produced shall consist of
unplasticized polyvinyl chloride and conform to the applicable requirements specified in ISO
4422-1, ISO 4065 and shall have a minimum required working strength of not less than 3.25
bar. The minimum tensile strength of the pipe shall be 25 MPa when determined in accordance
with ISO/TR 9080.
The pipes shall have the following characteristics as per ISO-4065
Outer Diameter (mm) Nominal Pipe Series Standard Wall Thickness
Pressure (S) Dimension (mm)
Min Max (PN) Ratio=2S+1 Min Max
160 160.50 4 25 51 3.20 3.80
200 200.60 4 25 51 3.90 4.50
250 250.80 4 25 51 4.90 5.60

Each pipe shall be clearly and indelibly marked with the following information at intervals
not more than 3 m.
a) Manufacturer’s name or trademark
b) Nominal outside diameter of pipe
c) Type as appropriate
d) Batch No
The material from which the pipes are produced shall consist of unplasticized polyvinyl
chloride. The manufactured pipes shall be highly resistant to salt water, acids, and alkalis. The
internal and external surface of the pipe shall be smooth and clean, and free from grooving and
other defects. The end shall be clearly cut and shall be square with the axis of the pipe. The end
may be chamfered on the plain side. Longitudinal grooves or irregularities in the wall thickness
shall not be permissible. The material should also consist of a sufficient quantity of stabilizer
to help the pipe withstand thermal ageing and exposure to ultra-violet light.

3.28.2 Construction
For laying pipes the trench should not be opened too far in advance of pipe laying and should
be backfilled as soon as possible. Excavation should be made under the bell of each pipe so that
the entire length of pipe, except the bell will be supported on the bottom of the trench. The
trench width below the top of the pipe affects the soil load imposed upon the pipe. Therefore,
this width should not be greater than that necessary to provide adequate room for joining the
pipe and compacting the initial backfill. If the pipes are joined above ground before being laid
in the trench, they should be brought to the temperature of the ground and backfill material in
order to avoid contraction.
Before laying pipes a layer of sand cushion 100 mm thick shall have to be provided below the
pipe. After laying the pipes the sides and interstice shall have to be backfilled by sand and
properly compacted by watering and non-mechanical means. The backing shall be continued

Page | 110
 minimum 300mm from the crest of the pipe. Each backfilling layer shall not exceed 150mm
after compaction. Mechanical members shall only be used above 300mm from the pipe crest.
If the trench is over excavated below a point of 100mm from the bottom of the pipe, but not
beyond a point of 300mm, it shall be necessary for this area to be backfilled with specified sand
and compacted as directed by Engineer in Charge. This excavation, backfilling and compaction
shall be done at the contractor’s own expense and shall not be claimed.
Among the fittings the Y-Joint shall be with or without access. There shall be plain T-joint,
sweep bend, socket plug, reducers, 45o bend, 90o bend with/without access as and where
required as per drawing and design. Solvent cement recommended by the manufacturer shall
be used for jointing all UPVC pipes and fittings.
Horizontal lines shall be properly fitted and fixed with walls and roof by standard clamps
recommended by the manufacturer and proper slope shall be maintained as per design and
isometric drawing.
3.28.3 Method of Measurement
Measurement for payment shall be made for the actual member of linear meter measured along
the piping axis including the length of fittings of any description including bends, tees, waste,
traps, socket plug, U-bend, access pipe etc.
3.28.4 Basis of Payment
The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid for at
the corresponding contract price for which payment shall constitute full compensation for
furnishing all materials like pipes, fittings, Joints, bends, traps, cleanouts, etc. complete for this
item of work. All equipment and labor including storage, handling and transport of materials,
installation and fixing of brackets, fixing bolts, and screws, cutting, gluing (solvent cement),
installing and connecting of pipes, fittings making holes or chase in wall or floor if necessary
and restoration thereof to original condition and all incidentals necessary to complete the work
as per plan.
Pay items shall be:

Item Name Unit

Linear meter
Supplying and laying uPVC pipe

Page | 111
 CHAPTER-4:

ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL MANAGEMENT PLAN (ESMP) &

ENVIRONMENTAL CODE OF PRACTICE (ECP)

4.1 Introduction
4.1.1 Background of the project
Bangladesh has been in rapid urbanization during the last few decades brought about by its
population growth, migration of rural population to urban areas, and the expansion of urban
areas. A study on population projection of Bangladesh from 2011 to 2061 presents that urban
population will have a drastic growth while the rural population growth will start to lessen from
2036-41. While the 2022 census is slightly lower than the projected population, the current
percentage of urban population is already higher than the estimates. Such rapid urbanization
demands urban governments to timely deliver quality services to its citizens more than ever.
The current urban governance in Bangladesh, however, has yet to meet these urgent and
increasing demands. Consequently, infrastructure development remains behind the above-
mentioned rapid urbanization amidst the growing traffic congestion, insufficient and unreliable
water supply, inadequate sanitation and waste management, and drainage problems.
To mitigate such poor situations, the Government of Bangladesh (GOB) emphasized the
importance of empowering the local government to play a more prominent role in local
development in the 6th Five-Year Plan 2011-2015 (6FYP), 7th Five-Year Plan 2016–- 2020
(7FYP), and the latest 8th Five-Year Plan 2020-2025 (8FYP). Despite progress from the 7FYP,
the 8FYP highlights several challenges faced by the Local Government Institutions (LGIs) to
ensuring good governance and delivery of desired services to the people which includes: (i)
unclear functions and responsibilities of LGIs, (ii) revenue discretion of LGIs and dependency
on the central government, (iii) shortage of staffing, (iv) non-participation and weak
accountability, (v) inadequate devolution of power for service delivery, and (vi) weak resource
mobilization effort.
In this regard, the Government of Bangladesh, and the Japan International Cooperation Agency
(JICA) signed a loan agreement for the Urban Development and City Governance Project
(UDCGP) (hereinafter called “the Project”) on August 12, 2020, following which the GOB
approved its DPP in June 2022. This project will contribute to the achievement of SDGs Goal
11: make cities inclusive, safe, resilient, and sustainable.
4.1.2 Project objectives
The project objective is to improve urban functions by strengthening city governance related to
infrastructure development in the target cities, thereby contributing to economic growth and
improvement of living conditions toward sustainable cities. Specifically, the project intends to
strengthen NCC in terms of infrastructure development and the services it provides through
capacity building. The project envisions that, in the long run, engineers stationed at NCC should
be able to plan in an appropriate manner and construct appropriately.

4.2 Environmental Code of Practice (ECP)

The main objective of this section is to make a provisional identification of potential impacts,
and overall environmental and social conditions in and around the subproject areas, which is
addressed in the IEE studies, and indicate how to mitigate (prevent or minimize) environmental
harms. Since the baseline information was collected during the JICA Preparatory Survey 2021,
the current baseline conditions can be changed by human interventions in the proposed sites.
Information through the desk-top study therefore was added to determine the most critical
assessment items to study.

Page | 112
4.2.1 Environmental Risks Identification and Mitigation Measures
The anticipated impacts have been assessed based on the subproject activities and consider the
pre-construction, construction, and operation stages. The following three steps are used to
identify or categorize consequences on the environment and social issues:
● Pre-construction Phase
● Construction Phase
● Operation Phase

4.2.2 Potential Environmental Impacts

The potential environmental impacts were assessed based on the subproject’s nature and scale
of activities. Most of the activities are small in scale and have some temporary impacts during
construction period which shall be mitigated by good environmental management following
the environmental management plan (EMP) and environmental Monitoring Plan (EMoP). The
anticipated impacts will be mainly for the construction period and during the operation, there
will be no impacts or impacts will be negligible. The summary of anticipated environmental
impacts is listed below:
4.2.3 Natural Environment
(1) Vegetation Clearance

There is a probability of vegetation clearance due to parking and movement of construction

vehicles and equipment, stockpiling, and labor camps. There is no protected area in or around
subproject sites of NCC-D-1, and no ecological critical area exists.
Mitigation Measures:
If any tree needs to be cut or felling down, it should be properly recorded. There should be
compensation plan for cutting trees and contractor(s) should prepare a tree plantation plan
(TPP) during preparation of Construction Environmental Management Plan (CEMP).
(2) Topography and Geology

The construction activities may affect the local topography and geology. Cutting and filling
will cause erosion of the slope, but the affect will not be significant. Some protective measures
against slope sliding or erosion, especially in the rainy season will be considered.
Mitigation Measures:
As much as possible, the effects of the topography or local geology should be limited. To
protect soil erosion, appropriate mitigation measures e.g., engineering controls should be in
place on the design and layout plan.
(3) Dust Suppression/Air quality

Due to construction activities, and frequent vehicle movement at the site in dry season and
moving large quantity of materials may create dusts and increase in concentration of vehicle-
related pollutants (such as particulate matter, and hydrocarbons) which will affect the local
natural environments and public health also. The impacts are negative but short-term, site-
specific within a relatively small area and reversible by mitigation measures, and Air Pollutions
(Control) Rules 2021.
Mitigation Measures:
Dust is easily minimized by implementation of a regular routine of light spraying with water.
All dust-generating surfaces, including those on the construction site and the haul road for at
least 200 m from the site, should be treated as frequently as is needed to avoid dust reaching
nuisance levels. Structures undergoing demolition should also be misted throughout the
process. All stockpiles of sand and soil should be kept tightly covered with tarpaulins whenever

Page | 113
 they are not in active use. All haul trucks should be equipped with tightly fitted tarpaulins to
prevent releases of dust from dry materials during transport. Ambient air quality at the
perimeters of the construction sites should meet the standard indicated in Schedule 2 of the
ECR 2023.
Although emission impacts are anticipated to be negligible, all motorized construction
equipment and all haul trucks should, as a later of good practice, be maintained to a high
standard, most particularly their fuel and exhaust systems. Emissions from motorized
machinery used in construction should meet the standard indicated in the ECR 2023 and Air
Pollutions (Control) Rules 2021.
(4) Groundwater Pollution

Impacts on the quality of groundwater resource can be caused by using dirty or contaminated
equipment. Excavation works and other construction activities may cause pollution of the
nearby groundwater sources by accidental spillage of hazardous liquid waste, oils, fuels, paints,
chemicals etc. The impacts are negative but short term, site-specific within a relatively small
area.
Mitigation Measures:
Siltation and sedimentation of watercourses can be largely prevented by careful application of
erosion control measures. These include:
o Protecting disturbed soil from rain by keeping exposed areas covered with mulches,
fiber mats and other temporary coverings.
o Keeping all stockpiles of erodible materials covered with tarpaulins whenever they are
not in active use.
o Arranging construction site drainage, surface runoff is directed away from exposed
soils and materials stockpiles.
o Installing and regularly maintaining sediment traps in site runoff channels; and
o Promptly establishing protective vegetative cover on soil surfaces (especially sloped
ones) in locations where construction activity has been completed.
Contamination of surface waters and groundwater can be avoided by good construction site
management, including implementation of such measures as:
o Storing fuels and other noxious fluids within roofed, rain-exclusive containment
structures with capacity at least 110% of the volume of the largest container stored.
o Strictly requiring use of drip mats during refueling and equipment repairs and
servicing.
o Maintaining a regimen of systematic daily checks of all motorized equipment and tanks
to detect leaks, so they can be promptly repaired; and
o Training all workers involved in refueling, equipment servicing and moving containers
on proper spill prevention and response.
(5) Noise/Vibration

In and around the construction sites, noise level will be deteriorated temporarily due to the use
of motor engines, noise generating equipment, manual works for excavation of earth surface,
trenching, using of wielding machine and concrete works, and using vehicle for transportation
of equipment, materials, and people. However, the impacts are negative but short-term, site-
specific within a relatively small area and reversible by mitigation measures.
Mitigation Measures:
To minimize noise and vibration impacts for residents living in the vicinities of construction
sites, construction activity should be strictly limited to daylight hours. To avoid adding to the
traffic noise for roadside residents, all haul trucks must be kept in good repair, and fitted with
functional mufflers. Proper maintenance of machinery and trucks shall be done not to cause extra
vibration. Emissions from individual pieces of machinery and vehicles used in construction

Page | 114
should not be allowed to exceed the maximum acceptable levels of national standards.
(6) Waste Pollution:

Solid waste will be generated at the working place during construction like packaging, empty
drums, site occupancy by workers, and broken and unused materials. Even hazardous materials
may also be generated consisting of oily rags, empty drums, containing residues, and packaging
materials for parts and machinery with grease and oil adhered to the surface. In case domestic
waste from the workers’ camp is not appropriately treated, the rotting waste may produce a foul
odor. However, increased commercial activities around the improved drainage system also pose
the risk of waste being dumped into the drains. The waste stream will grow over time, and if this
is not anticipated in monitoring design (the drains should be easily accessible for complete
cleaning), waste management problems such as ad-hoc dumping and on-site burning are sure to
arise.
Mitigation Measures:
To manage construction wastes or other wastes generated by the construction works, should be
collected, and disposed of in the safe disposal points i.e., mostly it is to be the city corporation
waste collection system. A nos of waste bins will be put in different parts of the construction
areas to collect and manage the waste. A dedicated waste collection staff will be recruited by the
contractor to ensure good and healthy waste management in the construction sites. On other side,
construction wastes like Re-bar, Soil waste, concrete should be recycled and managed properly.
Waste management problems can be avoided entirely by correctly anticipating future waste
streams and incorporating adequate design features to collect, sort, and dispose of each class of
waste. Adequate segregated collection bins should be strategically placed at indoor and outdoor
locations of the drain side structures where waste generation can be expected. The design of the
drains should also include the access points where they can be cleaned. The experience from
NCC reveals that drainage systems should have some access points when extreme rainfall events
occur, or waste dumping blocks an entire drainage system.
(7) Soil Contamination:

The chief threat to soil during construction is erosion, especially during extreme rainfall events
and flash floods. Valuable topsoil may be lost to nearby surface water bodies if not properly
protected from rain and overland flow. The sites in the NCC appeared to be clayey to sandy and
slope is gentle (almost flat), so the risk of erosion is low.
Mitigation Measures:
Soil erosion can be greatly minimized by ensuring that areas of soil not protected by vegetation
should be kept covered with mulches, fiber mats and other protective coverings like semi-
permeable fabrics. Exposed soil should be promptly revegetated as soon as works are completed
in each area of the site. To prevent oil spillage, a steel tray should be used to exchange oil, mobile
and grease from engine. If oil spillage occurs, contaminated soil should be removed
immediately, and sand or other lost soils should be refilled in the void space.
(8) Land Use and Utilization of Local Resources

Land Use patterns in urban areas frequently change due to different kinds of development
activities. Most of the drains, roads, and other infrastructures under these subprojects will be
within the existing roadsides. So, the land use pattern will not be changed significantly.
Mitigation Measures:
After completion of the works, the site should be refilled immediately by using excavated
materials with other foreign materials if required.
(9) Climate Change Impact

Climate change is likely to bring somewhat more frequent and severe flooding to the NCC
given the current drainage congestion and lack of drainage structures. Since Climate Change is

Page | 115
 likely to increase rain in future, mostly getting heavier in a short period of time, existing
drainage structures will fail to carry the water runoff and create prolonged waterlogging in the
proposed urban areas.
Mitigation Measures:
The drains are proposed for construction to remedy the flooding problems. It is assumed that
after construction of NCC-D-1 drain the flooding problem will be resolved in that areas.
However, during the design of the drains, it needs to be considered that recent climate change
projections suggest higher amount of rainfall in a small window of time in the future. The depth
and length of the drains need to be designed accordingly. Adequate saucer drains connecting
with the main drains are necessary to manage excess road water runoff.
(10) Biodiversity effects

The NCC-D-1 subproject is in urban areas which are devoid of vegetation and fauna. Therefore,
no impact is expected.
Mitigation Measures:
To mitigate the biodiversity effects, the working hours should be limited to 7 pm from 6 am.
As much as possible, avoiding excessive noise generation. If any trees were cut or felling down,
it should be counted and recorded properly and a TPP should be implemented accordingly.
4.2.4 Social Environment
(1) Livelihood
The proposed drains under NCC-D-1 subproject will have a significant positive impact on the
local livelihoods. During the rains, the proposed sites will be free from flooding which will
increase local transport and foster local commerce. The roadside commercial structures and
residences will be most benefited. But due to construction works, roadsides livelihood (e.g.,
small grocery stores, other floating businesses etc.) will be affected, but the impact will be short
terms. To mitigate this problem, advance notice to be given to the business holders, and
inventory of Loss (IoL) will be prepared and implemented.
Mitigation Measures:
To calculate the actual impact on livelihood, an Inventory of Loss (IoL) should be prepared by
the project and implemented prior to commencement of the construction works. On the other
hand, local people will get priority to work on the project either on a contractual or daily basis.
(2) Labour Influx
Due to the subproject construction, labor migration will occur from outside of the working areas
that will increase labor influx. For this influx, the risks of infectious disease, local conflict, will
be increased at the construction sites.
Mitigation Measures:
To minimize and prevent construction camp impacts and maximize the project's benefits to the
local community, the primary contractor and all its sub-contractors should be contractually
required to hire mostly or exclusively residents for construction jobs.
(3) Public health and safety:
With the drainage system being improved, the already busy premises in NCC will be an
increasingly busy commercial areas with heavy traffic and pedestrians, and this will elevate the
risk of collisions between vehicles and pedestrians, and between any of the several kinds of
vehicles. Accidents involving pedestrians are also made more likely by a lack of sidewalks,
which forces pedestrians and all vehicles, including large trucks, to share the roadway. On the
other hand, for labour influx, there is a chance to increase the infectious disease (e.g., Typhoid,
Cholera, Dysentery, etc.,) to the community people.
Mitigation Measures:
Traffic Management Plan (TMP) will be developed by the contractor prior to the

Page | 116
commencement of the construction work. The Traffic plan should consider the entire traffic
catchment of NCC-D-1 area. The top slab/cover of the proposed drains need to be designed in
a manner that pedestrians can use them as footpath. The top cover also needs to be wheelchair
friendly, so that baby strollers, wheelchairs for elderly people may stroll smoothly. If the top
covers are more than six inches higher than the road, putting some lower areas in the design
will be required so that the wheelchairs and baby strollers can easily ascend and descend from
the footpath.
(4) Traffic Congestion:

NCC-D-1 drains are characterized with high population density and high traffic volume. In
most cases, the proposed sites are adjunct to nearby main roads. However, earthen uphill roads
run to connect few sites. Given the main road’s traffic volume, it is expected that during peak
construction time when heavy vehicles and machineries will be transported at full scale, the
extra traffic movement will disrupt the normal traffic at a moderate significance. Especially
sites located in the suburb areas, a traffic plan needs to be devised before construction goes
onboard.
Mitigation Measures:
The contractor should prepare a comprehensive TMP that should be approved by the PMU or
NCC and this TMP should be accessible to the construction or working areas to avoid risks of
accidents. The vehicle speed should be limited to 25/30 km/hr in the project areas during
transportation of materials to the site and all drivers should have valid driving licenses and child
drivers or helpers will not be allowed to transport the project materials.
(5) Occupational Health and Safety

The workers or other staff will be at risk for workplace hazards during construction period in
the working areas if appropriate mitigation measures are not undertaken properly. These risks
include slipping, contact with moving machinery, flying, and falling objects, dust, burns, cuts,
exposure to intense light from arc welding, electric shock, and electrocution, and crushing from
collapsing earth walls, amongst other things. Where construction is conducted in public rights-
of-way, there are also dangers associated with vehicles moving past the work site.
Construction camps are problematic in terms of occupational health and safety because
contractors tend to invest as little as possible in their construction, operation, and upkeep, partly
on the assumption that camps area by nature temporary and based on a characterization of
construction workers as rough people accustomed to rough living conditions. This lack of
investment in camps usually results in crowded and unsanitary living conditions, inadequate
toilets and washing facilities, low-quality water supplied for drinking, cooking, and bathing,
and various dangers such as single exit sleeping sheds, lack of fire extinguishers, and exposed
wires. The health risks for residents of construction camps are heightened dramatically when
viral illnesses are circulating in the general population, as has been the case in 2020 with
COVID-19. In Bangladesh, it is not uncommon for construction workers to sleep in rows in
poorly ventilated sheds, with less than 1 m between them and less than 2 m2 space per person
overall; workers also often gather to eat in the same sheds, for lack of dedicated mess halls or
other eating space.
Mitigation Measures:
Risks to worker safety on the job site can be successfully minimized though proper worker
training, and by strict use of task-appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE). All workers
and site supervisors should be provided workplace safety training prior to the start of
construction, and at regular intervals thereafter.
Training should be repeated whenever new crews are brought on to the site, and whenever
monitoring by the primary contractor or construction supervision consultant reveals declining
standards of practice on the site. The primary contractor should ensure that all workers are
provided with adequate PPE suited to any task they may be given, and strictly always enforce
its use.

Page | 117
 Contractors should provide safe drinking water supply and sanitation facilities for the workers
and staff at the construction site., and First Aid Box with primary medicines should be available
at the working areas. There should be emergency contact details and emergency team leader to
meet the emergency at the site. Suitable face masks must be supplied to all workers and replaced
daily; use of masks should be always required except when using other types of masks required
for work activities, or when eating, bathing, and sleeping.
The contractor should prepare site specific Environment, Health, and Safety plan
(HSE) and share with the PMU to review. Risks to workers from poor conditions in construction
camps can be greatly minimized by full implementation of a site-specific Construction Camp
Management Plan for each camp that will be established. The Construction Camp Management
Plan will be appended to the CEMP. The Construction Camp Management Plan should specify,
at minimum,
 dormitories with good cross-ventilation at least 4 m2 living space per person.
 two or more working exits and at least one high-capacity fire extinguisher maintained
in good working order for all residential structures.
 indoor eating space separate from sleeping areas.
 kitchens with off-floor food storage, raised working surfaces of a material that can be
easily sanitized, and a ready supply of clean water.
 toilet facilities with at least one functional toilet (protected from the elements and
affording full visual privacy to the user) per ten resident workers, with a ready water
source for washing.
 roofed and partitioned wash-up areas with floors and proper drainage.
 physical separation between sleeping spaces on the one hand, and kitchens and
storerooms on the other.
 wiring that meets the requirements of the Bangladesh National Building Code; and
 provision of unlimited drinking water that meets the standards indicated in the ECR
2023
(6) Infectious Disease

A temporary influx of migrant labor during the construction period may increase the risk of
transmitted diseases. Uncontrolled vending of food and drinking water at the work site may
also pose a risk with respect to the transmission of contagious diseases like COVID 19,
Typhoid, Diarrhea, Malaria, and Dengue etc.
Mitigation Measures:
To reduce the risk of infectious diseases, an awareness session should be conducted among
workers. In the labor camp, it is to be ensured that the workers have access to safe drinking
water supply, sanitation facilities, and a sufficient space in the camp to take rest for the workers.
If anyone can be affected by such diseases, he will be immediately transferred to the nearest
hospital for proper treatment. The contractor(s) should have emergency vehicles to meet the
emergency.
4.2.5 Grievance Redress Mechanism for Workers
An additional mechanism shall be set up by the PMU to accept and address complaints from
workers employed in the construction works, concerning working conditions, living conditions
in construction camps, safety and health issues, labor rights violations, mistreatment, or any
other matter. All laborers, skilled workers, and site engineers employed on site by the primary
contractor or by any of its subcontractors shall have access to the mechanism. All workers will
receive an orientation to the workers' GRM during pre-construction induction training.
Workers will be able to lodge grievances with on-site personnel of the PIU, who will record the
complainant's name, position, employer, and contact information, as well as a description of

Page | 118
 the complaint and the time, date, and place at which the complaint was reported. The PIU will
inform the PMU, which will record the grievance in a grievance register. The PMU will
convene a conference call with the PIU, contractor or subcontractor involved, and any labor
syndicate to which the complainant may belong to decide on an appropriate resolution of the
complaint. The LGED PMU's Environmental Safeguards Focal Person (ESFP) and on-site
Environment, Health, and Safety Officer (EHSO) to monitor implementation of the proposed
resolution and confirm absence of retaliation on the part of the contractor involved, or its agents.
If the complaint cannot be resolved to the worker's satisfaction, the worker will be given the
information needed to file a complaint with the field level GRC (level 1) . The member secretary
of each GRC will compile a complete record of the grievance, including measures taken for
resolution and follow-up checks by the ESFP and EHSO, and subsequent evolution of the case.
4.2.6 Environmental Management Plan (EMP) and Social Management Plan (SMP)
The environmental management plan (EMP) is developed in relation to the design,
construction, and operation of NCC-D-1 subproject to address the physical, biological, cultural,
and socio-economic impacts.
The EMP defines mitigation and monitoring measures and identifies the institutions,
responsibilities and mechanisms that will ensure their implementation. Such institutions and
mechanisms will ensure continuous improvement of environmental protection activities during
the pre-construction, construction, and operation phases of the subprojects), to manage adverse
impacts.
The EMP's purpose is served by fulfilment of several key objectives:
 To present a comprehensive and systematic list of measures for mitigating and enhancing
anticipated environmental and social impacts.
 To define and specify institutional arrangements to support implementation of the
prescribed measures.
 To clearly assign responsibility for implementation of each prescribed measure.
 To clearly assign responsibility for systematic monitoring of implementation of the
prescribed measures and overseeing corrective action as needed.
 To establish a system for regular reporting on EMP implementation.
 To identify training and capacity-building needed to enable effective implementation of the
EMP, and
 To provide sound estimates of the costs that will have to be budgeted by various entities to
enable full and effective implementation of all prescribed measures to address likely
impacts.

4.2.7 Environmental Impacts and Prescribed Mitigation and Enhancement Measures

The potential impacts and corresponding measures that are prescribed to mitigate the negative
impacts or enhance positive ones for NCC-D-1 (RCC drain in East side of Bangabandhu road
with footpath (Ch 00-Ch 2+225.00m)) is described below.

Page | 119
Table 4.2.6.1: Environmental and Social Management Plan (ESMP) for NCC-D-1 (RCC drain in East side of Bangbandhu road with footpath (Ch 00-Ch 2+225.00m)).

Parameter Potential impacts Mitigation/enhancement measures Implementing Supervision Performance indicators Estimated cost In
and/or issues entities responsibility BDT
A. PRE-CONSTRUCTION PHASE
Land acquisition and No land acquisition is N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Resettlement required
Disturbance to poor No impact is anticipated at N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
classes this stage
Deterioration of Local No impact is anticipated at N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Economy such as this stage
Losses of Employment
and Means of
Livelihood.
Land Use and No impact is anticipated at N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Utilization of Local this stage
Resources.
Disturbance to No impact is anticipated at N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Existing social this stage
infrastructure and
social services.
Disturbance to No impact is anticipated at N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Local this stage
Communities
and Decision
making
Institutions.
Unequal No impact is anticipated at N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Distribution of this stage
Benefits and
Compensation
Local Conflicts of No impact is anticipated at N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Interest this stage
Gender No impact is anticipated at N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
this stage
Children’s Right No impact is anticipated at N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
this stage
B. CONSTRUCTION PHASE

(i) Biophysical Environment

1. Surface water • Siltation and • Appropriate design should be Contractor(s) PIU/ PMU • Contractor(s) should prepare a
sedimentation of prepared based on the natural waste management plan
watercourses from soil setting of the working areas.,

Page | 1
 Parameter Potential impacts Mitigation/enhancement measures Implementing Supervision Performance indicators Estimated cost In
and/or issues entities responsibility BDT
erosion and entrainment therefore the design outfall needs to including surface water Included in
of fine materials; be shielded from pollution. protection from pollution. contract cost.
• Excessive enrichment of • Surface water quality (e.g., pH, • Prescribed soil protection
surface waters from raw BOD5, Temperature, TDS, TSS, COD, measures effectively
sewage discharged by total coliform, DO, Oil and grease) implemented at all work sites.
construction camps should be tested periodically over • Vegetative cover promptly
lacking adequate septic the construction period to observe if established when construction
systems any change in quality due to activity completes on each part
construction works. The test results of work sites.
should be included in the monthly or • At least one working toilet per
quarterly progress report and shared 10 resident workers installed.
with PIU and PMU for checking. • Lab report of surface water
• Protect disturbed soil from rain by quality
keeping exposed areas covered with
mulches, fiber mats and other
temporary coverings.
• Keep all stockpiles of erodible
materials covered with tarpaulins
whenever they are not in active use.
• Arrange work site drainage to
prevent concentration of surface
runoff in the vicinity of exposed soils
and materials stockpiles.
• Install and regularly maintain
sediment traps in site runoff
channels.
• Install an adequate number of toilets
to accommodate all workers, and
septic systems of sufficient capacity
for the expected effluent volume, in
accordance with Construction Camp
Management Plan.
2. groundwater • Contamination from leaks • Ground water quality should be Contractor(s) PIU/PMU • Contractor(s) should prepare a Included in
and spills of fuel and tested in and around the waste management plan Contract costs
noxious fluids e.g., oil, construction sites (zi and include in including groundwater
grease. Mobil, and the quarterly/monthly protection from pollution.
wastewater from labor environmental progress report. • Fuels, lubricants and other
camps and toilet facilities • Keep all drilling and mixing activities noxious fluids are stored in
at the construction sites. at least 100m far from the existing appropriate structures.
streams, especially the canal on the • Lack of evidence of leaks from
west side; put silt barriers along the construction equipment
canal. • Lack of oil patches on soil
• Keep all motorized equipment in surface.
good repair. • Lack of oily sheen on site runoff
• Maintain a regiment of systematic water.
daily checks to detect leaks, • Lab report of groundwater
following up with prompt repair as quality etc.
needed.
• Strictly require use of drip mats and
pans during refueling and servicing
to catch spills and drips.
• Store fuels and other noxious fluids
within roofed, rain-exclusive
containment structures with

Page | 2
 Parameter Potential impacts Mitigation/enhancement measures Implementing Supervision Performance indicators Estimated cost In
and/or issues entities responsibility BDT
capacity at least 115% of the volume
of the largest container stored,
constructed only in locations with
zero probability of flooding during
heavy rains.
• Provide training in spill prevention
and spill response to all workers
involved in refueling or equipment
servicing
3. Air quality • Dust from construction • Air quality (e.g., PM10, PM2.5, NOx, Contractor(s) PIU/ PMU • Levels of airborne dust are
works create nuisance SOx, CO) should be tested quarterly below nuisance level in roadside Included in the
and health hazard for and included in the environmental communities. contract cost.
residents near work sites; progress report. • No significant dust
Emissions from • Water spraying needs to be very accumulation observed on
equipment and vehicles frequent on this road to suppress roadside crops and structures.
used in construction the dust. • No complaints from public
degrades local air quality • Implement a regimen of misting all • Verifying the air quality lab
dust-generating surfaces throughout report.
the workday during dry weather, • Absence of black smoke in
since all the roads are busy places, construction equipment
the frequency of water spray should exhaust
be thrice a day during the dry
periods.
• Tightly cover stockpiles of fine
materials with tarpaulins whenever
they are not in active use to prevent
wind erosion.
• Equip all haul trucks with tightly
fitting tarpaulins and enforce their
use.
• Maintain all motorized equipment
used in construction to a high
standard.
• Use only fuel-efficient equipment
etc.
4. Noise and • Noise and vibration will • Using good quality machinery, Contractor(s) PIU / PMU • Low noise generating engine, Cost included
Vibration be increased significantly vehicle and trucks. machine, and vehicles. in the contract
due to using of heavy • Working hours should be limited to • Lab report of Noise and cost.
machinery, vehicles, and 06 am to 06 pm (daylight only). vibration.
trucks. • Using hydraulic horns will be • Log sheet of vehicle movement
restricted by project vehicles & and speed record.
trucks. • Awareness building among
• Noise and vibration should be workers, drivers, and machine
measured monthly at the operators etc.
construction sites, and data should • No construction work or hauling
be shared with the is conducted between dusk and
monthly/quarterly environmental dawn.
progress report. • No complaints from the public
• Maintain all motorized equipment registered
and haul trucks to a high standard
and inspect exhaust systems
regularly.

Page | 3
 Parameter Potential impacts Mitigation/enhancement measures Implementing Supervision Performance indicators Estimated cost In
and/or issues entities responsibility BDT
5. Soil Quality • Loss of topsoil to erosion • Protect disturbed soil from rain by Contractor(s) PIU/ PMU • Prescribed soil protection Included in
keeping exposed areas covered with measures effectively Contract costs.
mulches, fiber mats and other implemented at all work sites.
temporary coverings. • Lack of evidence of soil erosion
• Arrange work site drainage to • Vegetative cover promptly
prevent concentration of surface established when construction
runoff in the vicinity of exposed activity completes on each part
soils. of work sites
• Promptly establish vegetative cover
on soil surfaces in locations where
construction activity has been
completed.
• Prevent soil from depositing in the
roadside drains.
• Using steel tray for exchanging oils,
mobile, grease from engine and if
spillage occurs, the contaminated
soil should be removed immediately
and replaced by foreign materials
(e.g., sand and soil mixtures).
6. Waste • Pollution from improper • Implement all provisions in the Contractor(s) PIU/PMU • All classes of waste are Included in
management of solid Waste Management Plan, including: managed in accordance with Contract costs.
waste generated at work • Provide waste receptacles on the the Waste Management Plan.
sites and construction work sites and collect their contents • No evidence of waste oil
camp. daily or weekly as needed. dumping or burning
• Recycle all recyclables through local • Documentation of transfers to
providers of this service. identified service provider
• Compost organic wastes generated available.
by construction camp kitchens. • No evidence of waste oil
• Dispose of non-recyclable and non- dumping or burning
organic wastes as directed in the • Documentation of transfers to
Waste Management Plan embedded identified service provider
within the CEMP, as based on locally available
available and approved disposal
options.
7. Offensive Odor • Least concern for • Organic wastes should be kept in Contractor(s) PIU/PMU • Organic wastes collection and Included in the
offensive odour waste bins and dumped in the CCs dumping system. contract costs.
generation at the site. designate sites. • Toilet facilities at the
• Worker’s toilets should be sanitary, workplace.
neat, and clean etc.
8. Protected Areas • No PAs included in the • N/A N/A N/A • N/A N/A
subproject’s areas.
9. Hydrology • Least concern for • Ensure good quality of construction Contractor(s) PIU/PMU • Quality of drainage Included in the
hydrological changes due is undertaken at the site. construction. contract cost.
to the subproject’s • The improvement of drainage will • Improvement of outfalls
activities. improve the surface hydrology by conditions.
reducing water logging.
10. Topography & • Soil erosion may have • Protect disturbed soil from rain by Contractor(s) PIU/PMU • Prescribed soil protection Included in the
Geology influence on changes of keeping exposed areas covered with measures effectively contract cost.
topography in the mulches, fiber mats and other implemented at all work sites.
working areas. temporary coverings. • Lack of evidence of soil erosion
• Arrange work site drainage to • Vegetative cover promptly
prevent concentration of surface established when construction

Page | 4
 Parameter Potential impacts Mitigation/enhancement measures Implementing Supervision Performance indicators Estimated cost In
and/or issues entities responsibility BDT
runoff in the vicinity of exposed activity completes on each part
soils. of work sites
• Promptly establish vegetative cover
on soil surfaces in locations where
construction activity has been
completed.
• Prevent soil from depositing in the
roadside drains.
11. Ecosystem • Unnecessary/ necessary • Keeping records of each tree species Contractor(s) PIU/PMU • A tree plantation plan (TPP) Included in the
removal of trees if needed to clear. should be prepared and contract cost
• The contractor will prepare a tree implemented properly. (1:3, if 1
plantation plan (TPP) and share with tree cuts, 3 trees will be
C-EMP including the information of planted).
nos of trees, types of trees, and size
of trees.
• If one tree cuts, then 3 trees will
plant (1:3) ratio will be followed for
tree plantation.
• Local and fruit species will be
encouraged to include in the TPP for
plantation etc.
(ii) Social Management Plan (SMP)
12. Land Acquisition • No land acquisition is • N/A N/A N/A • N/A N/A
needed
13. Disturbance to • The shops/livelihood • To reduce the loss of impact to the Contractor(s) PIU/ PMU • Records of nos of affected Included in the
livelihood activities beside the livelihoods, the project will prepare livelihoods, and compensation contract cost.
proposed drainage site the inventory of loss (IoL) and take provided for the affected
will be affected proper compensation plan. people.
temporarily due to • Local people’s employment will • Employment record of local
subproject activities. enhance the situation. people by the project etc.
• Due to subproject activities, local
business (small) opportunity will
increase also.
14. Disturbance to • Ethnic minority will not • Periodically monitoring the issues Contractor(s) PIU/ PMU • Checking the record book for no N/A
ethnic minority be affected. particularly in NCC areas that no ethnic minority is affected by
minority people is affected by the NCC-D-1 subproject activities.
groups and subproject’s activities.
indigenous people
15. Deterioration of • The shops/livelihood • To reduce the loss of impact to the Contractor(s) PIU/ PMU • Records of nos of affected Included in the
local economy activities beside the livelihoods, the project will prepare livelihoods, and compensation contract cost.
proposed drainage site the inventory of loss (IoL) and take provided for the affected
will be affected proper compensation plan. people.
temporarily due to • Local people’s employment will • Employment record of local
subproject activities. enhance the situation. people by the project etc.
• Due to subproject activities, local
business (small) opportunity will
increase also.
16. Land Use and • Due to stockpile of • Preventive measures like stockpile Contractor(s) PIU/PMU • Nos of actions taken for Included in the
Utilization of local project materials, and will not exhaust dust emissions, landfilling, managing excavated contract cost.
construction works e.g., landfilling will be carried out materials, and stock piling etc.,
resources earth excavation, refilling properly, excavated materials will be checked by record book.
etc., will change the local managed properly etc.
land use pattern.

Page | 5
 Parameter Potential impacts Mitigation/enhancement measures Implementing Supervision Performance indicators Estimated cost In
and/or issues entities responsibility BDT
17. Disturbance to • No major impact is • No mitigation measures are required Contractor(s) PIU/ PMU • No indicator is required. No cost is
water usage, anticipated since the for this item. required for
subprojects do not affect
water rights etc. the water usage or water this item.
rights.
18. Disturbance to the • Traffic congestion may • Mitigation measures for traffic Contractor(s) PIU/ PMU • Traffic congestion indicators will Cost will be
existing social cause a temporary congestion is applicable for this be used for this item. included in the
disturbance to social item.
infrastructure and structures like contract cost
services educational institutes and under the
religious institutes etc. traffic
congestion
item.
19. Traffic congestion • Air quality, noise • A traffic management plan (TMP) Contractor(s) PIU/ PMU • Daily Log sheet of vehicle Cost is
pollution, accident, public will be prepared by the contractor(s) movement included in the
health, and safety will be including good practices like good • Accident record
at risk due to increasing condition vehicles, one-way or • Training or capacity records contract cost.
the traffic volume, alternative route approach or using, • Copy of driving licenses
vehicle speed will not exceed to • Driver ID card
25/30 km per hr during moving
around the project sites, no child
driver or helper will be allowed, and
all drivers will have the valid driving
licenses.
20. Misdistribution of • There is a possibility to a • Disturbance on local economy, local Contractor(s) PIU/ PMU • Records of losses including Cost is
benefits and losses misdistribution of livelihood etc., should receive types, size and compensation included in
benefits or compensation compensations for loses as per payment etc.
for local livelihood losses. estimated value of IoL. disturbances
to livelihoods
under contract
cost of
contractor(s).
21. Local conflict of • Construction camps are • Give preference to local laborers to Contractor(s) PIU/PMU • Lack of reports of worker- Cost is
interest locus of violence against avoid the need for, or limit the size involved abuse or harassment included in the
women and girls; of, a construction camp. • Lack of complaints from public
Construction camps serve • Conduct proactive outreach with about violence or prostitution contract cost.
as source of social leaders of nearby communities to at camp
conflict, possibly leading educate women and girls about the • Female access to camp for
to violence risks posed by an all-male camp in employment allowed only when
the neighborhood. workers are out at work sites
• Give resident workers regular
training on appropriate behavior in
and around the camp.
• Adopt a zero-tolerance policy
around aggression or violence
against local women and girls.
• When women must enter the camp
for employment or selling produce,
limit their entry to times when
resident workers are out at the work
site.
• Prohibit prostitution on the site and
monitor activity in this regard and

Page | 6
 Parameter Potential impacts Mitigation/enhancement measures Implementing Supervision Performance indicators Estimated cost In
and/or issues entities responsibility BDT
work with community leaders to
address the problem as needed.
• Provide regular training and
enforcement to minimize bad
worker behavior off site, including
public drunkenness, sexual
harassment, and theft of crops.
22. Cultural heritage • Cultural heritages will not • Contractor(s) will keep the record Contractor(s) PIU/ PMU • Contractor’s record book No additional
be affected due to small that no cultural heritage is affected cost is
scale construction. or disturbed by the construction
works of NCC-D-1 subproject, labor required for
camps, and stock yard etc. this item.
23. Gender • Unequal opportunity of • Opportunity of employment shall be Contractor(s) PIU/ PMU • Contractor’s record book Cost is
employment properly provided both for male and included in the
female.
contract cost.
24. Children’s right • Child labor • Prohibit labor contracts between Contractor (s) PIU/ PMU • Periodically check of labor Cost is
contractors and children. contracts. included in the
• Patrolling periodically to check for
any child labor contract cost.
25. Infectious diseases • Temporary influx of • Implementation of periodic medical Contractor (s) PIU/ PMU • Sanitation for workers Cost is
migrant labor during check-ups by temporary medical • Access to safe drinking water included in the
construction may team. • Using of mask, hand sanitizers
increase risk of infection. • Education and training on health • Checking record books of contract cost.
care of workers. medical checkups etc.
• To prevent COVID-19, the
Government of Bangladesh (GoB)
protocol will be strictly maintained
including use of masks, hand
sanitizers, social distancing, avoiding
social gathering, temperature
recording etc., will be ensured at the
site.
26. Workplace safety • Risks to worker health • Provide regular safety training for all Contractor(s) PIU/ PMU • Labor accidents Cost is
and safety from improper workers. • Diseases caused by air included in the
work site practices • Provide task-appropriate PPE to all pollutants, water pollutants,
• workers and enforce its use. and noise by construction contract cost.
• • A close monitor works at all times to work.
ensure strong worker compliance • Disturbance to residents by
with safety practices. labor and/or security guards.
27. Accidents • Elevated risks to • Ensure that the construction sites Contractor(s) PIU/ PMU • Adequate fencing and security Cost is
pedestrians on approach are adequately fenced, and security maintained at construction included in the
road is provided to prevent members of sites.
• the public from entering the sites. • Construction zone is configured contract cost.
• Establish safe, marked routes for to maintain safe access for
tourists and local pedestrians tourists and local pedestrians.
without having to cross active • Haul trucks not observed or
construction zones. reported to speed through
• Impose and enforce low speed limits Dolphin More/Sugandha beach
on haul trucks through Dolphin more approach road or elsewhere
area and approach road ins along approach road.
Sugandha beach.
28. Cross-border • Climate change issues like • Dressing the preventive measures of Contractor(s) PIU/PMU • Wetting the dry surfaces Cost is
impact and dust suppressions, & reducing dust suppressions e.g., included in the

Page | 7
 Parameter Potential impacts Mitigation/enhancement measures Implementing Supervision Performance indicators Estimated cost In
and/or issues entities responsibility BDT
Climate change exhaust gas emissions wetting the dry surface and • No black smoke emissions from contract cost.
from vehicles, machinery controlling the exhaust gas the vehicles and machinery
will elevate the air emissions e.g., ensure good quality used in the project site.
pollution temporarily. vehicles and machinery used in the • Tree plantation over the
site. working areas etc.
• Due to improvement of drainage
system, water logging will be
reduced significantly that will
increase the CC in the working areas.
• Tree plantation plan (TPP) to be
executed by the contractor(s) over
the working areas.
C. OPERATION PHASE
(i) Biophysical Environment
29. Soils • Erosion of soils during • Protect soils exposed by LGED/ LGED/ • Lack of evidence of gully erosion NQC
maintenance works maintenance works with mulches NCC NCC (Included in
involving excavation and other protective coverings
and/or deteriorated during works, and promptly re- NCC /LGED
ground cover establish vegetative cover when operating
works have been completed. costs)
• Regularly inspect site vegetation for
loss of coverage and evidence of
emerging gully erosion
(ii) Socioeconomic and Cultural Environment
30. Public safety • Elevated accident risk due • Regularly monitor facility operations LGED/ LGED/ • Safety features implemented. NQC
to increased traffic on the for emerging public safety issues, NCC NCC • Accident risk low (Included in
road and devise appropriate corrective
action, as needed. NCC/LGED
• Proactively coordinate with LGED to operating
ensure that safety features including costs)
sidewalks, pullout and turn lanes,
road markings, signage and other
safety features are planned for and
implemented in future approach
road upgrades
(iii) Waste Management
31. Solid waste • Pollution from improper • Ensure that appropriate waste LGED/ LGED/ • Recyclable solid waste is NQC
management of solid management procedures for all NCC NCC consistently segregated and (Included in
waste from road users components of the solid waste picked up by a reputable
stream are specified in each facility's recycling business. NCC /LGED
operations and maintenance manual • Non-recyclable solid waste is operating
consistently taken to a legal costs)
landfill for disposal.
• Lack of evidence of waste
dumping or burning on site
Source: Initial Environmental Examination (IEE) Report for Orange Category Subprojects for Urban Development and City governance Project (UDCGP).

Page | 8
4.4 Environmental and Social Monitoring Plan (EMP)
Environmental monitoring and inspection will consist of: (i) environmental impact monitoring;
and (ii) EMP performance verification (compliance monitoring). Environmental impact
monitoring will assess the degree to which the project environmental management and
mitigation measures are successful in avoiding impacts to the biophysical environment (soils,
air quality, water quality) and the socio-economic environment (livelihoods, quality of life,
occupational health and safety, public health, and safety) during the project's construction and
operation phases. The PMU will engage an environmental focal point for monitoring and
reporting. PMU in complying with, or adhering to, the EMP and CEMPs prepared by the
contractor(s) for each contract, beginning with documentary checks, clearances, and specialized
implementation plans that must be obtained or developed before construction can begin.
Performance verification monitoring will continue through the construction and operation
phases. The PMU will conduct performance verification during the pre-construction and
construction phases, after which this will become the responsibility of the IAs. Details of the
monitoring requirements and tasks covering all sites and all three project implementation
phases are compiled in an Environmental Monitoring Table (EmoT), presented in Table -4.1
below.
Table 4.1: Environmental and Social Monitoring Table (EMoT)

Environment Method, Location, Parameters Responsibility

al Criterion & Frequency
Construction Phase
Soil erosion ● Method: Visual inspection ● Daily during
and ● Location: NCC-D-1 drains sites, including borrow construction
contaminatio pits and access roads as applicable phase.
n ● Parameters: (i) adequacy of soil erosion prevention;
measures; (ii) adequacy of soil contamination
prevention techniques; (iii) evidence of excessive
soil erosion or soil contamination. (iv) record of oil,
Mobil, or grease changes from engine etc.
Slope ● Method: Visual inspection ● Daily
protection ● Location: NCC-D-1 drains sites, including borrow monitoring
pits and access roads sites as applicable during
● Parameters: (i) adequacy of soil protection measures construction
like retention wall, shoring etc.; (ii) adequacy and phase.
evidence of slope protection techniques; and (iv)
record of application of slope protection measures
undertaken for the applicable subprojects etc.
Surface and ● Method: Visual inspection; worker interviews as ● Daily during
ground water needed construction
pollution ● Location: NCC-D-1 drains sites, including borrow phase
pits and access roads as applicable
● Parameters: (i) adequacy of spill and leak prevention;
measures, including storage of chemicals, fuels,
lubricants; (ii) worker awareness of spill response
plan; (iii) evidence of spills and leaks on ground
surface; (iv) appropriate use of settling basins for
process water; (v) appropriate connections to sewers
and septic tanks
Air quality ● Method: Observation; interviews with local people, ● Daily during
and digital equipment used for air quality construction
measurements. phase

Page | 1
Environment Method, Location, Parameters Responsibility
al Criterion & Frequency
● Location: NCC-D-1 drains perimeters nearest to
residences; by side of access and haul roads as
applicable; at borrow pits as applicable
● Parameters: Airborne dust level, appearance of
machinery exhaust
● Wetting the dry surface over the construction sites
(twice per day).
Livelihoods ● Method: Interviews with workers and site managers ● Quarterly
● Location: At the construction sites
● Parameters: Percentage of local workers on site
Noise ● Method: Observation; interviews with residents ● Daily during
● Location: At perimeter of the construction sites construction
nearest to residences. phase
● Parameters: (i) adherence to prohibition on noisy site
activity between dusk and dawn; (ii) presence of
functional mufflers on motorized equipment; (iii)
complaints of residents.
Worker ● Method: Visual inspection; and interviews with ● Daily during
health and workers construction
safety ● Location: At the construction sites phase
● Parameters: (i) worker use of personal protective
equipment; (ii) adherence to the approved Health and
Safety Management Plan (HSMP); (iii) performance
of the EHSO; (iv) worker complaints and concerns
Public health ● Method: Observation; interviews with nearby ● Daily during
and safety residents, interviews with local police construction
● Location: Near the construction sites phase
● Parameters: (i) adherence to approved temporary
traffic management plan; (ii) adequacy of
construction site signage, fencing and security
presence; (iv) accidents involving public and
workers; (v) emergencies and responses; (v) public
complaints.
Solid waste ● Method: Visual inspection ● Daily during
management ● Location: At the construction sites and its peremiters. construction
● Parameters: (i) adequacy of solid waste collection, phase
storage, containment, and disposal system; (ii)
absence of solid waste dumps or evidence of waste
burning; (iii) proper disposal of construction waste in
legal landfill
EMP ● Method: Review of (i) monitoring reports and data; ● PMU, PIU -
Compliance (ii) documentation of corrective action; (iii) overall yearly
contractor compliance with terms of CEMPs; (iv)
project's overall adherence to EMP and loan
covenants
● Location: NCC-D-1 sites.
● Parameters: Contractor performance relative to
CEMPs and contracts; project performance relative
to stipulations of EMP
After Construction Completion

Page | 2
 Environment Method, Location, Parameters Responsibility
al Criterion & Frequency
Post- ● Post-construction site inspection ● Post-
construction construction
site site
inspection inspection
4.4.1 Reporting and feedback adjustment
To ensure proper and timely implementation of the EMP and adherence to the agreed
environmental covenants, the PMU will submit to JICA quarterly environmental monitoring
reports, based on quarterly progress at the field level. The reports should confirm the project’s
compliance with the EMP and identify any environment-related implementation issues and
necessary corrective actions and reflect these in a corrective action plan. The performance of
the contractors will also be reported on with respect to environmental protection and impact
mitigation. The operation and performance of the project GRM, as well as environmental
institutional strengthening and training, will be included in the annual environmental progress
report as well. Table 4.2 summarizes the project's environmental reporting requirements and
responsibilities.
Table 4.2: Environmental reporting requirements and responsibilities

Report Frequency Purpose From To

Contractor's Monthly Satisfy EMP Contractor PMU
Progress Report
Environmental Quarterly Monitoring of Environmental PMU
Monitoring Report environmental effects Specialist of
PIU
Environmental Quarterly Adherence to PMU JICA
monitoring report environmental
covenants and EMP
4.4.2 Environmental and Social Monitoring Budget
Cost estimates for mitigation measures, environmental monitoring, public consultations, and
capacity building are summarized in Table-4.6 & Table-4.7. Contractors will bear the direct
costs of all mitigation measures during construction, which will be included in the tender and
contract documents; this includes features built into facility designs to prevent environmental
impacts from arising. The IAs will bear the costs related to mitigation measures during
operation. Costs related to environmental supervision during construction will be borne by the
IAs (for hiring a licensed laboratory to conduct quarterly monitoring), the PMU (for the
activities of the environmental consultants) and by the contractors (for monitoring work carried
out by the EHSO).

Table 4.6 Environmental and Social Monitoring items for NCC-D-1 subproject

Sl. No Description of activity

1 Soil erosion and slope protection monitoring at every working section of the pipelines
during construction. Especial attention should be paid at the Camp site also. Soil
erosion should be monitored using visual inspection and will be judged by the
supervision environmental officer/engineer
2 Debris disposal and waste management on camp sites. Temporary camp site waste
disposal facility improvement 2 nos (1 no of organic waste and 1 no of inorganic
waste disposal facility) Site cleaning, Removal, and disposal activities
3 Traffic management during construction, equipment for traffic management, employ
02 workers at each site for traffic management, traffic signs, site demarcation
materials, awareness to the community members etc.

Page | 3
 Sl. No Description of activity
4 Medical supplies (First Aid box), other medical requirements, note, equipment, kits,
dress etc.
5 Health safety warning signs and log maintenance, COVID-19 response as identified in
the EMP
6 Personal Protection equipment including hard helmet, hard boots/rubber boots, life
vest, hand gloves, face shield/eye shield etc.
7 Safe Drinking water facilities for campsites
9 Separate male female toilet facilities for camp and work site, sanitary facilities,
Response to COVID-19 as stipulated in the EMP
10 Water spraying to control fugitive dust
Furthermore, contractors will ensure that they have the following items under the environmental and
social management and monitoring plan, and the cost of the below-mentioned mitigation measures will
be borne by the provisional budget.
Table 3: Additional items for environmental and social management during construction period

Sl. No Description of activity Quantity

1 Recruit and appoint an EHSO (Environment, Health, and 24 months
Safety Officer) for NCC-D-1 site
2 EMP training / capacity building 1 training/month
3 (a) Quarterly Air quality monitoring (ECR 2023 Schedule 8 rounds of quality testing
2): Parameters: 1.PM2.5; 2.PM10; 3. S02; 4. NOx and for Air, Surface Water
5.CO quality, Groundwater
(b) Quarterly Surface Water quality monitoring (ECR 2023 quality, and Noise level
Schedule 3) Parameters: 1. pH; 2. Turbidity; 3. Total measurements which will be
Coliform (TC), Fecal Coliform (FC); 4. Arsenic (As); 5. carried out quarterly and
Salinity; 6. Total Suspended Solids (TSS); 7. Dissolve analyzed in the government
Oxygen (DO); 8. Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD); accredited laboratory.
9. Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD)
(c) Quarterly Groundwater quality monitoring (pH, TDS,
Chloride, As, Fe, Mn, S, TC, FC)
(d) Quarterly Noise Levels (ECR 2023 Schedule 4): Day (1
hr. average)

Page | 4